{"title":"Lincoln Electric Stick Welding Electrodes \u0026 Rods — 483 SKUs","description":"\u003cstyle\u003e\n.lm-shop-grid{display:grid;grid-template-columns:repeat(auto-fit,minmax(220px,1fr));gap:16px;margin:24px 0}\n.lm-shop-card{border:1px solid #e0e0e0;border-radius:8px;padding:16px;background:#fafafa}\n.lm-shop-card a{text-decoration:none;color:#cc0000;font-size:1.05em}\n.lm-shop-card p{margin:8px 0 0;font-size:0.92em;color:#444;line-height:1.45}\n.lm-hub-intro p{font-size:1.05em;line-height:1.55}\n.lm-table{width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:20px 0;font-size:0.93em}\n.lm-table th{background:#cc0000;color:#fff;padding:9px 12px;text-align:left}\n.lm-table td{padding:8px 12px;border-bottom:1px solid #e0e0e0;vertical-align:top}\n.lm-table tr:nth-child(even) td{background:#f9f9f9}\n.lm-cta-banner{background:#f5f5f5;border-left:4px solid #cc0000;padding:14px 18px;margin:24px 0;border-radius:4px}\n.lm-cta-banner p{margin:0;font-size:1em}\n.lm-section-intro{font-size:1.02em;line-height:1.6;margin-bottom:16px}\n.lm-faq-item{border-bottom:1px solid #e8e8e8;padding:14px 0}\n.lm-faq-item:last-child{border-bottom:none}\n.lm-faq-q{font-weight:700;font-size:1em;color:#1a1a1a;margin-bottom:6px}\n.lm-faq-a{font-size:0.96em;line-height:1.6;color:#333}\n\u003c\/style\u003e\n\n\u003ch1\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods — 483 SKUs In Stock\u003c\/h1\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-hub-intro\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeldingMart is an authorized Lincoln Electric distributor stocking 483 stick welding electrode SKUs: mild steel (6010, 6011, 6013, 7014, 7018, 7024, 7028), low-alloy (8018, 9018), stainless (308L, 309L, 316L), and Wearshield hardfacing. Every rod ships from our warehouse — not a third-party seller — with same-day shipping on in-stock orders and lifetime expert support from welders who use these products. Whether you are running a cross-country pipeline root pass with E6010 Pipeliner 5P+, pulling a structural ticket with E7018 Excalibur, or doing quick farm-shop repairs with E6011 Fleetweld 180, we have the rod you need in the size you need it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-shop-grid\"\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"lm-shop-card\"\u003e\n    \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods?filter.p.vendor=Lincoln+Electric\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAll Lincoln Electric Stick Electrodes\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\n    \u003cp\u003eComplete catalog — Fleetweld, Excalibur, Pipeliner, Wearshield, and stainless (483 SKUs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"lm-shop-card\"\u003e\n    \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/lincoln-stick-welders\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Stick Welders →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\n    \u003cp\u003eAC-225, Invertec V155-S, Idealarc series — machines built for stick electrodes (24 SKUs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"lm-shop-card\"\u003e\n    \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-accessories\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStick Accessories →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\n    \u003cp\u003eElectrode holders, ground clamps, rod ovens, and storage tubes (82 SKUs).\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"lm-shop-card\"\u003e\n    \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/tig-rod-welding-rods\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTIG Filler Rods →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\n    \u003cp\u003eER70S-2, ER308L, ER4043 and more for GTAW applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is Stick Welding? Overview \u0026amp; When to Use It\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"lm-section-intro\"\u003eStick welding — formally called Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) or Manual Metal Arc (MMA) welding — is an arc welding process that uses a consumable electrode coated in flux. When the arc forms between the electrode tip and the base metal, the flux coating vaporizes to create a shielding gas cloud that protects the molten weld pool from atmospheric contamination (oxygen, nitrogen, hydrogen). The flux also deposits slag that covers the solidifying weld bead and slows its cooling rate, improving toughness. The result is a simple, self-shielded process that requires no external shielding gas cylinder.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eStick welding is the right process when:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou are outdoors or in windy conditions.\u003c\/strong\u003e SMAW self-shielding is immune to wind that would blow away MIG or TIG shielding gas. Pipeline crews, structural ironworkers, and field-repair crews use stick almost exclusively for this reason.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe base metal is rusty, dirty, or coated.\u003c\/strong\u003e High-cellulose electrodes like E6010 and E6011 generate forceful penetrating arcs that cut through mill scale, rust, and light surface contamination. MIG wires and TIG rods cannot tolerate these conditions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eYou need to access tight joints.\u003c\/strong\u003e A 14-inch electrode holder and a 3\/32-inch rod can reach places a MIG gun physically cannot. Maintenance welders rely on stick for this reason.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCode-quality work requires certified procedures.\u003c\/strong\u003e AWS D1.1 structural steel, ASME B31.3 process piping, and API 1104 pipeline welding all list SMAW as a qualified welding process. The E7018 electrode is the backbone of structural code welding in North America.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEquipment cost matters.\u003c\/strong\u003e A Lincoln AC-225 transformer welder costs a fraction of a MIG setup and runs every stick electrode you'll ever need. For farm shops, small contractors, and hobbyists, stick is the most economical entry into arc welding.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhere stick welding is \u003cem\u003enot\u003c\/em\u003e the best choice: thin sheet metal (MIG or TIG produces less distortion), high-volume production (MIG wire-feed is faster), and precision TIG-quality welds on aluminum or exotic alloys.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuyer's Guide: How to Choose a Stick Electrode\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"lm-section-intro\"\u003eChoosing the correct stick electrode comes down to four variables: base metal composition and condition, welding position, available power source, and required mechanical properties. Get any one of these wrong and you'll have porosity, underbead cracking, or a weld that fails inspection. Here's how to work through each variable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e1. Match the Electrode to the Base Metal\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe rule of thumb is to match or slightly overmatch the tensile strength of the base metal. For mild steel (A36, A572), any E60XX or E70XX rod works — E70XX is the standard choice for structural work because the 70,000 psi minimum tensile strength of the weld deposit exceeds the 58,000–80,000 psi range of A36. For higher-strength steels (A514, A517), move to E8018, E9018, or E10018 low-alloy electrodes that match the higher yield strength. For stainless steel, use AWS A5.4 electrodes — E308L for 304 stainless, E309L for dissimilar joints, and E316L for marine or chemical service.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e2. Account for Base Metal Condition\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the base metal is clean, primed, or freshly ground, you have the full range of electrode choices. If it's rusty, galvanized, or coated, reach for a high-cellulose electrode — E6010 or E6011 — whose deep-digging arc and fast-freeze slag handle contamination better than iron-powder or low-hydrogen rods. Never use E7018 (or any low-hydrogen rod) on heavily contaminated metal: the low-hydrogen coating is a moisture trap, and hydrogen cracking will result if the weld is made into contaminated material without proper preheat and joint prep.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e3. Check Your Power Source\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is the selection step most beginners get wrong. Stick electrodes are rated for DC+, DC−, or AC polarity — and some machines only output one type. The Lincoln AC-225 (the most common farm-shop welder in North America) is an AC-only transformer. That means you cannot run E6010 on an AC-225: E6010 requires DC+ (DCEP) to maintain arc stability. E6011 was specifically engineered as the AC-compatible alternative to E6010. E6013, E7018, and most iron-powder rods run on both AC and DC. Before ordering electrodes, confirm whether your stick welder outputs AC, DC, or both. See our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/lincoln-stick-welders\"\u003eLincoln stick welders page\u003c\/a\u003e for machine specifications by model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e4. Consider Welding Position\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe third digit in an AWS electrode designation tells you what positions the rod is rated for. A \"1\" in the third digit (E6011, E7018) means all-position — flat, horizontal, vertical, and overhead. A \"2\" in the third digit (E7024, E6020) means flat and horizontal only. Iron-powder rods in the 7020 and 7024 series are fast-deposition flat-position rods used on production fabrication where position is controlled. If you are welding overhead or vertical, do not buy a flat-only rod.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e5. Low-Hydrogen Storage Rules\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE7018 and other hydrogen-controlled (H4R, H8, H16) electrodes absorb moisture from the air and must be stored in a rod oven (250–300°F) or sealed container. Lincoln's \"MR\" (Moisture Resistant) designation on Excalibur 7018 MR means the rod can sit exposed in ambient conditions for up to 9 hours before needing to be returned to the oven. Standard 7018 gets only a few hours of exposure. Moisture in a low-hydrogen rod causes porosity and hydrogen-induced cracking. We stock Lincoln rod ovens, holding ovens, and sealed storage cans — see our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-accessories\"\u003estick accessories collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eElectrode Classification Deep Dive — AWS A5.1 Mild Steel\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"lm-section-intro\"\u003eAWS A5.1 covers carbon steel (mild steel) electrodes for shielded metal arc welding. The designation system reads: E = electrode, first two digits = minimum tensile strength in ksi (60 = 60,000 psi, 70 = 70,000 psi), third digit = welding position, fourth digit = flux coating type and current compatibility. Here are the seven AWS A5.1 classifications you'll encounter at WeldingMart.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE6010 — Deep Penetration, DCEP Only\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E6010 is a high-cellulose sodium electrode engineered for deep penetrating welds and fast-freeze slag. It runs DC+ (DCEP) only — do not attempt to run it on AC. Arc characteristics are forceful and \"digging,\" making it the choice for root pass welding on pipe where the electrode must push through tight root openings and fuse both sidewalls. It tolerates dirty, rusty, and galvanized steel better than any other classification. Spatter is moderate and slag removal is easy. The Lincoln Electric trade name is Fleetweld 5P+. Common AWS designation: E6010.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable class=\"lm-table\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eE6010 Specification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Tensile Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e62,000 psi (427 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Yield Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50,000 psi (345 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22% min.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolarity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDCEP (DC+) only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePositions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll (F, H, V, OH)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-cellulose sodium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest Applications\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePipeline root pass, structural root, dirty\/rusty steel, field repair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLincoln Trade Name\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFleetweld 5P+, Pipeliner 6P+\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE6011 — All-Position, AC\/DC Compatible\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E6011 is the AC-compatible version of E6010. It uses a high-cellulose potassium flux coating that stabilizes the arc on AC current, enabling use with transformer welders like the Lincoln AC-225 that cannot run E6010. Penetration and slag characteristics are similar to E6010 — deep, fast-freeze, all-position — but the arc is slightly softer and spatter is marginally higher on AC. For field repairs, farm shops, and anywhere an AC machine is the only tool on site, E6011 is the go-to. The Lincoln trade name is Fleetweld 180. Runs on DCEP, DCEN, and AC.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable class=\"lm-table\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eE6011 Specification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Tensile Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e62,000 psi (427 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Yield Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50,000 psi (345 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22% min.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolarity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDCEP, DCEN, AC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePositions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll (F, H, V, OH)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-cellulose potassium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest Applications\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC machine repairs, dirty\/rusty steel, galvanized, farm \u0026amp; field work\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLincoln Trade Name\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFleetweld 180\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE6013 — Beginner-Friendly, Smooth Arc\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E6013 uses a high-titania potassium coating that produces a soft, easily controlled arc, a fluid weld pool, and a slag that lifts off cleanly — all traits that make it the easiest stick electrode for beginners. Penetration is shallow (a feature, not a bug, when welding light-gauge sheet metal where burn-through is the enemy). The arc can be run with a short arc length without sticking. Restrike is easy. The tradeoff: E6013 has no business on thick structural steel or on dirty base metal — its fluid slag can trap porosity on rough surfaces. Use it on clean, light-gauge steel for HVAC fab, ornamental iron, auto sheet metal, and hobby projects. Lincoln trade name: Fleetweld 37. Runs on DCEP, DCEN, and AC.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable class=\"lm-table\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eE6013 Specification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Tensile Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e62,000 psi (427 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Yield Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50,000 psi (345 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17% min.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolarity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDCEP, DCEN, AC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePositions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll (F, H, V, OH)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-titania potassium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest Applications\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSheet metal, light fab, beginners, clean mild steel, ornamental iron\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLincoln Trade Name\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFleetweld 37\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE7014 — Iron-Powder, High Deposition, All-Position\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E7014 is an iron-powder titania electrode — essentially an E6013 with iron powder added to the coating to boost deposition rate and improve flat-position productivity. It lays smooth, flat beads with very low spatter and a slag that peels off easily. Unlike E7024 (which is flat-only), E7014 is rated for all positions, making it useful for production fillet welds that occasionally require vertical or overhead passes. Current can be AC, DCEP, or DCEN. Not a structural code rod — use E7018 for AWS D1.1 pre-qualified joints — but excellent for general fabrication, shipbuilding, and storage-tank work where code requirements are not strict. Lincoln trade name: Fleetweld 47.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable class=\"lm-table\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eE7014 Specification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Tensile Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e72,000 psi (496 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Yield Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60,000 psi (414 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17% min.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolarity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDCEP, DCEN, AC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePositions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll (F, H, V, OH)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIron-powder titania\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest Applications\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduction fillet welds, general fabrication, storage tanks, shipbuilding\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLincoln Trade Name\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFleetweld 47\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE7018 — Low-Hydrogen, Structural Code Standard\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E7018 is the most important stick electrode in North American structural welding. Its low-hydrogen iron-powder coating deposits weld metal with exceptionally low diffusible hydrogen content (the \"MR\" Lincoln Excalibur version targets ≤4 mL\/100g as-deposited), which prevents hydrogen-induced cold cracking (HICC) in high-restraint joints. It is the standard electrode for AWS D1.1 structural steel, ASME pressure vessel, and bridge welding. Weld deposit is smooth and flat with minimal spatter. All-position. Runs best on DCEP; most formulations also run on AC. Requires proper storage in a rod oven at 250–300°F (Lincoln Excalibur MR extends exposure tolerance to approximately 9 hours). Lincoln trade name: Excalibur 7018 MR.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable class=\"lm-table\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eE7018 Specification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Tensile Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e72,000 psi (496 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Yield Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60,000 psi (414 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22% min.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCVN Impact (−20°F)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 ft-lbf min.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolarity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDCEP (primary), AC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePositions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll (F, H, V, OH)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow-hydrogen iron-powder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest Applications\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStructural steel (AWS D1.1), pressure vessels (ASME), heavy plate, high-restraint joints\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLincoln Trade Name\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExcalibur 7018 MR\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiffusible Hydrogen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH4R (≤4 mL\/100g) — Excalibur MR designation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE7024 — Iron-Powder, Flat\/Horizontal Only, Maximum Deposition\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E7024 is a high-iron-powder rutile electrode optimized for maximum deposition rate in flat and horizontal fillet welds. Its thick iron-powder coating (up to 50% iron powder by weight) produces deposition rates that rival semi-automatic FCAW — often 2–3× higher than E7018 in the flat position. This is the production welder's flat-fillet rod for shipyards, heavy fabrication, and structural assembly where positions are controlled and throughput matters. Do not use E7024 out-of-position — the fluid slag makes vertical and overhead welding impractical. Runs AC, DCEP, or DCEN. Lincoln trade name: Jetweld 1.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable class=\"lm-table\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eE7024 Specification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Tensile Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e72,000 psi (496 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Yield Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60,000 psi (414 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17% min.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolarity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDCEP, DCEN, AC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePositions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat \u0026amp; Horizontal only (F, H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIron-powder rutile (high iron content)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest Applications\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-volume flat fillet welds, shipyards, structural fabrication shops\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLincoln Trade Name\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJetweld 1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE7028 — Low-Hydrogen Iron-Powder, Flat\/Horizontal Code\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E7028 combines the low-hydrogen chemistry of E7018 with the iron-powder high-deposition characteristics of E7024. The result is a flat\/horizontal-only rod that meets low-hydrogen code requirements (AWS D1.1 pre-qualified) while delivering higher deposition rates than E7018 in flat and horizontal positions. Used in structural fabrication shops where D1.1 code compliance is required and welding positions can be controlled. Low-hydrogen storage rules apply: keep in a rod oven at 250–300°F. Runs DCEP and AC. Lincoln trade name: Jetweld LH-70.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable class=\"lm-table\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eE7028 Specification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Tensile Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e72,000 psi (496 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. Yield Strength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60,000 psi (414 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22% min.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolarity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDCEP, AC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePositions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat \u0026amp; Horizontal only (F, H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow-hydrogen iron-powder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBest Applications\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eD1.1 code structural work in flat\/horizontal position, high-deposition bridge and building fab\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLincoln Trade Name\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJetweld LH-70\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAWS A5.5 Low-Alloy Electrodes — E8018, E9018, E10018\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"lm-section-intro\"\u003eAWS A5.5 covers low-alloy steel electrodes for SMAW. These electrodes deposit alloyed weld metal — typically containing Cr, Ni, Mo, or combinations — to match the mechanical properties of higher-strength, quenched-and-tempered steels. All A5.5 electrodes are low-hydrogen and require rod-oven storage at 250–350°F.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE8018-C3 \/ E8018-B2 — 80,000 psi Minimum Tensile\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE8018 electrodes target minimum 80,000 psi tensile strength. The most common in general construction is E8018-C3 (Ni-Mo alloy system), used for welding higher-strength structural steels like A572 Grade 65, A514, and HY-80. E8018-B2 (1.25% Cr, 0.5% Mo) is used for chrome-moly alloy steel in elevated-temperature power plant piping. Both require DCEP polarity and preheat per the applicable WPS. Lincoln designation includes Excalibur 8018-C3 and Excalibur 8018-B2.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE9018-M — 90,000 psi, Military and Pressure Vessel\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE9018-M (the \"M\" suffix = Military grade, meeting Mil-Spec hardness and toughness minimums) targets minimum 90,000 psi tensile strength with excellent low-temperature Charpy impact toughness. Used for A514, A517, HY-100, and submarine hull steel welding procedures. Also used in pressure vessels and heavy lifting equipment. DCEP only. Preheat and interpass temperature control is critical — these high-strength deposits are sensitive to hydrogen cracking if proper procedures are not followed. Lincoln designation: Excalibur 9018-M.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE10018-M — 100,000 psi, Ultra High Strength\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE10018-M targets 100,000 psi minimum tensile strength for the highest-strength structural steels and military applications (HY-130, A514 Grade Q, T-1 steel). Requires strict hydrogen control, preheat per the AWS D1.1 Annex I table for high-strength steels, and careful interpass temperature management to avoid martensite formation. DCEP only. Available in select sizes from Lincoln Electric as part of their Excalibur high-strength series. Call 1-800-293-4483 to confirm availability on specific sizes and quantities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAWS A5.4 Stainless Steel Electrodes — 308L, 309L, 316L\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"lm-section-intro\"\u003eAWS A5.4 covers stainless steel electrodes for SMAW. Lincoln Electric's Stainless line covers the three most-used alloy families. Stainless stick electrodes run on DCEP (DC+) almost exclusively — the arc on AC is unstable with most stainless formulations. Use lower amperage than carbon steel equivalents of the same diameter to minimize carbide precipitation and heat input at the weld.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE308L-16 — General-Purpose 304 Stainless Welding\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE308L-16 is the standard electrode for welding 304 and 304L stainless steel. The \"L\" suffix means low carbon (0.04% max in the weld deposit), which resists sensitization (chromium carbide precipitation at grain boundaries that leads to intergranular corrosion) in the 800–1500°F sensitization range. Used in food-service equipment, chemical processing, pharmaceutical manufacturing, and architectural stainless fabrication. The \"-16\" suffix indicates a rutile-type coating suitable for AC and DCEP — though most fabricators run DCEP for best arc stability. Lincoln designation: Lincoln 308L-16.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE309L-16 — Dissimilar Joints: Stainless to Carbon Steel\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE309L-16 is formulated for joining 304\/316 stainless steel to carbon or low-alloy steel — dissimilar metal joints where a high-chromium, high-nickel filler is needed to resist dilution cracking. It is also used as a buttering layer before applying stainless cladding over carbon steel, and for welding 309 and 310 stainless base metals. The higher alloy content (23% Cr, 13% Ni nominal) provides a more austenitic deposit that resists martensite formation in the dilution zone. DCEP. Lincoln designation: Lincoln 309L-16.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eE316L-16 — Marine and Chemical Service\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE316L-16 adds 2–3% molybdenum to the 308L chemistry, which dramatically improves resistance to pitting and crevice corrosion in chloride-containing environments (saltwater, bleach solutions, acids). Used in marine fabrication, offshore platforms, chemical plant equipment, and pharmaceutical vessels. If you are welding 316 stainless that will be exposed to seawater or chlorinated process streams, E316L-16 is the correct electrode. Do not substitute E308L in these applications — the weld deposit will pit. DCEP. Lincoln designation: Lincoln 316L-16.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStick Electrodes by Application\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStructural Steel and Bridge Welding\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAWS D1.1 structural steel welding requires pre-qualified electrode-process combinations. E7018 (Lincoln Excalibur 7018 MR) is the dominant choice for multi-pass groove welds and fillet welds on structural shapes, plates, and connections. For flat\/horizontal production work in a fabrication shop, E7028 (Jetweld LH-70) is permitted under D1.1 pre-qualified status with higher deposition rates. For higher-strength steels (ASTM A913, A992, A514), E8018 or E9018 electrodes with matching strength are required per the WPS. All structural low-hydrogen electrodes must be stored per D1.1 Annex A low-hydrogen electrode control requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePipeline Welding (API 1104 \/ CSA Z662)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCross-country gas and liquid pipelines are welded using a two-rod system: E6010 (or E6010 equivalent Pipeliner 6P+) for the root pass and hot pass, then E7018 (Pipeliner LH-D80 or LH-D90) for the fill and cap passes. The Lincoln Pipeliner series is purpose-designed for this sequence — Pipeliner 6P+ provides the deep-digging, fast-freeze root pass characteristics required for open-root single-sided pipe joints, and the Pipeliner LH-D80\/LH-D90 low-hydrogen fill and cap rods meet the toughness requirements of API 1104 and CSA Z662. Distribution pipe (smaller diameter, lower pressure) and gas transmission mainline use slightly different procedures — call our technical team to confirm the rod for your specific API procedure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eRepair and Maintenance Welding\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eField repair welding on farm equipment, construction machinery, and industrial plant equipment typically involves unknown base metal, painted or galvanized surfaces, and AC-only welders. E6011 (Fleetweld 180) is the repair welder's most-used electrode: it runs on AC, handles contaminated surfaces, freezes fast enough for out-of-position work, and tolerates the wide variation in base metal chemistry found in castings and older structural steels. For hard-facing worn bucket teeth, crusher jaws, tractor track components, and mill hammers, the Lincoln Wearshield series provides abrasion-resistant hardfacing deposits — Wearshield BU for buildup layers and Wearshield 60 or Abr for the final abrasion-resistant cap.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHardfacing and Wear-Resistant Applications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHardfacing extends the life of earth-moving equipment, aggregate processing components, and farm tillage parts by depositing a wear-resistant alloy layer over the worn or rebuilt base. The Lincoln Wearshield series covers four deposit types: \u003cstrong\u003eWearshield BU\u003c\/strong\u003e is a buffer\/buildup rod with a machinable deposit suitable as an intermediate layer; \u003cstrong\u003eWearshield 60\u003c\/strong\u003e provides moderate hardness (approximately RC 55–60) for abrasion-only service like bucket lips and blade edges; \u003cstrong\u003eWearshield Abr\u003c\/strong\u003e provides high-hardness (RC 60–65) abrasion resistance for chute liners, crusher hammers, and conveyor screws; and \u003cstrong\u003eWearshield Mangjet\u003c\/strong\u003e is an austenitic manganese deposit for extreme impact service — bucket teeth, crusher jaws, and railroad frogs — where work-hardening in service is the wear mechanism. Hardfacing procedures typically use DCEP; check each rod's datasheet for amperage ranges by diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePolarity Guide — DCEP vs. DCEN vs. AC\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"lm-section-intro\"\u003eCurrent polarity is one of the most misunderstood topics in stick welding selection. Here is the complete reference.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDCEP — Direct Current Electrode Positive (Reverse Polarity)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn DCEP, current flows from the work (negative, ground clamp) through the arc to the electrode (positive). This concentrates approximately two-thirds of the arc heat at the electrode tip and work surface, producing deep penetration into the base metal. Most low-hydrogen electrodes (E7018, E8018, E9018) and high-cellulose pipeline rods (E6010) run best on DCEP. It is the standard polarity for modern inverter and transformer-rectifier DC stick welders. The Lincoln Invertec V155-S and most Lincoln DC machines output DCEP by default for the electrode holder circuit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDCEN — Direct Current Electrode Negative (Straight Polarity)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn DCEN, current flows from the electrode (negative) to the work (positive). Heat distribution reverses: approximately two-thirds of the arc heat is at the base metal, which reduces penetration into the work but increases electrode melt-off rate (deposition rate). DCEN is used with certain specialty electrodes and for surfacing\/cladding applications where shallow penetration is desired to minimize dilution of the hardfacing deposit. E6011 and E6013 can run DCEN; most iron-powder rods and low-hydrogen rods prefer DCEP.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAC — Alternating Current\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAC current reverses polarity 60 times per second (60 Hz in North America). Arc stability on AC depends on the flux coating chemistry — the arc extinguishes at every zero crossing and must be re-ignited. High-cellulose potassium (E6011) and titania potassium (E6013) coatings contain potassium compounds that ionize the arc gap and allow re-ignition at each zero crossing. Sodium-based coatings (E6010) do not re-ignite reliably on AC — this is why E6010 is DC-only. For farm shops and smaller contractors with Lincoln AC-225 transformer welders, E6011 is the all-position work-horse and E6013 is the thin-metal rod. E7018 AC formulations exist for AC machines, but the standard Excalibur 7018 MR runs best on DCEP.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable class=\"lm-table\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeat Distribution\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePenetration\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatible Electrodes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDCEP (DC+, Reverse)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e~2\/3 at electrode\/work\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDeep\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eE6010, E7018, E8018, E9018, stainless (308L, 309L, 316L)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDCEN (DC−, Straight)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e~2\/3 at work\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShallow (high deposition)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eE6011, E6013 (secondary), some cladding rods\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAlternating (equal avg.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModerate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eE6011, E6013, E7018-AC, E7014, most iron-powder rods\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAmperage Settings by Electrode Diameter\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAmperage is set by electrode diameter and position — not by rod classification (with a few exceptions). The table below gives typical starting ranges for the most common electrode diameters. Adjust up for flat position and larger groove sections; adjust down for vertical, overhead, or thin base metal. These are starting points — fine-tune by watching the weld pool and bead profile. A bead that is too narrow and convex needs more amps; a bead that undercuts the side walls needs less.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable class=\"lm-table\"\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDiameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eE6010 \/ E6011 (A)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eE6013 (A)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eE7018 (A)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eE7024 (A)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in. (2.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–85\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45–90\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e65–100\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eN\/A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in. (3.2 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–125\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80–130\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100–145\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125–185\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in. (4.0 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–170\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e105–180\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140–190\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160–240\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in. (4.8 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140–215\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150–230\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e175–250\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e210–300\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7\/32 in. (5.6 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e170–250\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e175–255\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e225–300\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e275–375\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 in. (6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e210–320\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e210–320\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e275–375\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e335–470\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLincoln Stick Welders — Machines to Run These Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEvery stick electrode in our catalog was designed, classified, and field-tested by Lincoln Electric — the same company that manufactures the machines to run them. Pairing Lincoln electrodes with Lincoln machines gives you a matched system: the arc force curves, open-circuit voltage, and output characteristics of Lincoln stick welders are optimized for Lincoln electrode coatings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eKey machines from our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/lincoln-stick-welders\"\u003eLincoln stick welders collection\u003c\/a\u003e:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln AC-225 (K1170)\u003c\/strong\u003e — The most common farm-shop stick welder in North America. AC output, 225A capacity, runs E6011, E6013, E7014, and AC-rated E7018. Cannot run E6010. Ideal for E6011 all-position repair work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Invertec V155-S\u003c\/strong\u003e — Compact 155A inverter DC welder. DCEP\/DCEN switchable. Runs all electrodes including E6010 and E7018. Portable (13 lbs) for field work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Square Wave TIG 200\u003c\/strong\u003e — Multi-process; runs stick (DCEP) and TIG. For shops that alternate between SMAW and GTAW.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Idealarc series\u003c\/strong\u003e — Heavy industrial AC\/DC transformer-rectifiers for production shops. AC for E6011\/E7018-AC and DC for E6010\/E7018 code work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-cta-banner\"\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNeed a machine recommendation?\u003c\/strong\u003e Call \u003ca href=\"tel:18002934483\"\u003e1-800-293-4483\u003c\/a\u003e — our team will match you to the right stick welder for your electrode needs. \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/lincoln-stick-welders\"\u003eBrowse all Lincoln stick welders →\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eElectrode Brands We Carry — Lincoln Electric, Hobart, Harris\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp class=\"lm-section-intro\"\u003eWeldingMart specializes in Lincoln Electric as an authorized distributor, but we also carry Hobart Brothers and Harris Products Group electrodes for customers who specify those brands in their weld procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eLincoln Electric — Fleetweld, Excalibur, Pipeliner, Lincore, Wearshield\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLincoln Electric is our primary electrode brand. We stock the full Lincoln stick electrode catalog — every series, most sizes, in both small-pack (1 lb, 5 lb) and production quantities (10 lb, 25 lb, 50 lb cans). Lincoln electrode trade-name families:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFleetweld\u003c\/strong\u003e — Field and utility electrodes: Fleetweld 5P+ (E6010), Fleetweld 180 (E6011), Fleetweld 37 (E6013), Fleetweld 47 (E7014). These are Lincoln's most-sold general-purpose rods, used on farms, in maintenance shops, and by general contractors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExcalibur\u003c\/strong\u003e — Code-quality low-hydrogen electrodes: Excalibur 7018 MR (H4R moisture resistant), Excalibur 7018-1 H4R (extra-low hydrogen toughness), Excalibur 8018-C3, Excalibur 9018-M. Used on AWS D1.1, ASME, and API-code jobs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePipeliner\u003c\/strong\u003e — Pipeline-specific electrodes engineered for API 1104 welding: Pipeliner 5P+ (E6010 root), Pipeliner 6P+ (high-yield E6010 root), Pipeliner LH-D80, Pipeliner LH-D90, Pipeliner 16P, Pipeliner 17P, Pipeliner 18P for fill and cap passes. Each rod in the Pipeliner series is formulated for the specific arc characteristics pipeline welders expect in their position in the weld sequence.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLincore\u003c\/strong\u003e — Hard-facing and build-up cored wire (also available as stick): Lincore 60-O, Lincore BU, Lincore M. Lincore for SMAW is less common than Wearshield but used in some overlay procedures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWearshield\u003c\/strong\u003e — Hardfacing stick electrodes: Wearshield BU, Wearshield 15CrMn, Wearshield 60, Wearshield Abr, Wearshield Mangjet, Wearshield MI. These cover the full range from buildup-layer to abrasion-resistant cap to manganese-impact service.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHobart Brothers — Stainless and Low-Alloy Options\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHobart Brothers (an ITW company) produces a strong line of stainless steel and low-alloy stick electrodes that complement Lincoln's product range. For customers whose weld procedure specifications call out Hobart electrodes by name — common in chemical processing and food-service fabrication shops — we stock Hobart 308L-16, 309L-16, and 316L-16. Hobart's mild-steel stick electrodes (235, 418, 447-A) offer AC-machine compatibility and are an alternative to Lincoln Fleetweld for customers who have a Hobart brand preference.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHarris Products Group — Specialty and Brazing\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHarris Products Group electrodes are available at WeldingMart primarily through our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/brands-harris\"\u003eHarris brand collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Harris stick electrodes are used in specialty applications including nickel-alloy welding and cast-iron repair. For customers requiring Harris stainless or low-alloy stick rods by specification, call our team at \u003ca href=\"tel:18002934483\"\u003e1-800-293-4483\u003c\/a\u003e for availability and lead times.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated Collections\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-shop-grid\"\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"lm-shop-card\"\u003e\n    \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/lincoln-stick-welders\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Stick Welders\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\n    \u003cp\u003eAll Lincoln Electric SMAW machines — AC-225, Invertec V155-S, Idealarc series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"lm-shop-card\"\u003e\n    \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/mig-welders-gmaw-fcaw\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMIG Welders (GMAW\/FCAW)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\n    \u003cp\u003eLincoln wire-feed MIG and flux-core machines for production welding.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"lm-shop-card\"\u003e\n    \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/tig-rod-welding-rods\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTIG Filler Rods\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\n    \u003cp\u003eER70S-2, ER308L, ER4043, ER5356 — GTAW filler metals for all base metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"lm-shop-card\"\u003e\n    \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-accessories\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStick Welding Accessories\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\n    \u003cp\u003eElectrode holders, ground clamps, rod ovens, and moisture-sealed storage cans.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Stick Welding Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is 7018 used for?\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-a\"\u003eE7018 is the standard electrode for structural steel welding under AWS D1.1, ASME pressure vessel codes, and bridge fabrication. Its low-hydrogen iron-powder coating produces weld deposits with minimum 72,000 psi tensile strength, good Charpy impact toughness at −20°F, and diffusible hydrogen content below 8 mL\/100g (H4R grade below 4 mL\/100g). It is used in structural shapes, heavy plate, columns, beams, and everywhere an X-ray-quality weld with documented hydrogen control is required. Lincoln trade name: Excalibur 7018 MR.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between 6011 and 6013?\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-a\"\u003eE6011 and E6013 both run on AC and DC, but they serve opposite ends of the welding spectrum. E6011 is a high-cellulose electrode with a forceful, digging arc and fast-freeze slag — it handles dirty, rusty, and contaminated metal and works in all positions. It is the field-repair and pipeline-compatible rod for AC machines. E6013 is a titania-coated beginner rod with a soft arc, fluid weld pool, and smooth, flat bead — ideal for clean, light-gauge sheet metal where the welder needs easy arc control and easy slag removal. E6013 cannot tolerate contaminated surfaces and will trap porosity on rust or mill scale. Use E6011 for field work and dirty metal; use E6013 for thin clean sheet metal and learning.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-q\"\u003e7018 vs. 6010 — which should I use?\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-a\"\u003eE7018 and E6010 are not interchangeable — they serve different applications. E6010 is a high-cellulose DCEP-only rod used for root pass welding on pipe, dirty metal, and anywhere a fast-freeze, deep-penetrating arc is needed. It is the standard pipeline root rod. E7018 is a low-hydrogen iron-powder rod used for fill\/cap passes, structural work, and code welding where hydrogen control is required. E7018 cannot run on AC and requires rod-oven storage. E6010 does not need special storage. On pipeline work, the standard procedure is E6010 root, then E7018 fill and cap. In structural fab, E7018 is used throughout. Choose E6010 for pipe root and dirty metal; choose E7018 for structural code work and fill passes.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the best stick welding rod for beginners?\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-a\"\u003eFor absolute beginners, E6013 (Lincoln Fleetweld 37) on a DC machine is the easiest: soft arc, easy to strike, easy to restart, minimal spatter, and the slag peels off cleanly. If you have an AC-only machine (like a Lincoln AC-225), E6011 (Fleetweld 180) is the better starting rod because E6013 does not always behave well at lower AC amperages. E6011 is more forgiving of arc length variation and works on a wider range of base metals. Avoid E6010 as a beginner rod — its DC-only, forceful arc is harder to control than E6011 or E6013, and it does not run on AC at all.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-q\"\u003eCan I run 6010 on an AC welder?\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-a\"\u003eNo. E6010 uses a high-cellulose sodium coating that cannot stabilize the arc through the 60 Hz zero crossings of AC current. The result is arc extinction, spitting, and an unusable weld. If you have an AC-only machine (Lincoln AC-225, Lincoln Tombstone), use E6011 instead. E6011's potassium-based coating re-ignites reliably at each AC zero crossing and delivers similar penetration and all-position capability. E6010 requires DCEP (DC electrode positive) from a rectifier or inverter-based welder.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-q\"\u003eHow do I store E7018 low-hydrogen electrodes?\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-a\"\u003eE7018 must be stored in a rod oven at 250–300°F (121–149°C) after the original hermetically sealed container is opened. Exposure to ambient humidity causes the low-hydrogen coating to absorb moisture, which increases diffusible hydrogen in the weld deposit and risks hydrogen-induced cold cracking (HICC). Lincoln's Excalibur 7018 MR designation extends the ambient exposure tolerance to approximately 9 hours before re-baking is required. Standard 7018 should be returned to the oven after 2–4 hours of exposure. If rods have been left out overnight, re-bake at 700–800°F (371–427°C) for 1 hour — do not re-bake more than twice. We carry Lincoln rod ovens and holding ovens in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-accessories\"\u003estick accessories collection\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-q\"\u003eWhat does the E in E7018 stand for?\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-a\"\u003eThe \"E\" stands for electrode. In AWS A5.1 and A5.5 designation: E = electrode for shielded metal arc welding; first two digits (70) = minimum tensile strength of the weld deposit in ksi (70,000 psi); third digit (1) = welding position (1 = all position, 2 = flat and horizontal only); fourth digit (8) = flux coating type, current compatibility, and hydrogen designator (8 = iron-powder low-hydrogen, DCEP or AC; H4R after the base designation = moisture-resistant, ≤4 mL\/100g diffusible hydrogen).\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the difference between E6010 and E6011 for pipeline welding?\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-a\"\u003eBoth E6010 and E6011 are used in pipeline welding, but they are not equivalent in the field. E6010 (Lincoln Pipeliner 5P+, Pipeliner 6P+) is the industry standard for root passes on gas and liquid transmission lines because its arc characteristics — fast freeze, deep penetration, tight control of the weld pool — match the demands of single-sided open-root pipe joints in all positions. E6011 can substitute on AC machines when DC is unavailable, but the softer arc makes root pass control more difficult and it is not used as a primary pipeline root rod on mainline work. E6010 is DC-only; E6011 runs on both AC and DC.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-q\"\u003eWhat electrode should I use for welding cast iron?\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-a\"\u003eCast iron stick welding typically uses a nickel-based electrode — the most common is an ENiFe-CI (nickel-iron) designation, sold under names like Lincoln Softweld 99Ni-1 or Harris Nickel-99. These electrodes deposit a soft, machinable nickel-iron alloy that tolerates the high carbon migration from cast iron and stays ductile as it cools. The alternative is a ENi-CI pure nickel rod, which is softer still but more expensive. Preheat (400–700°F depending on cast iron grade) and slow cool under insulation are critical to prevent cracking. Do not use E6013 or E7018 on cast iron — the hard, martensitic weld deposit will crack on cooling.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-q\"\u003eHow do I know what polarity to use for stick welding?\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-a\"\u003eCheck the electrode's AWS designation and datasheet. The fourth digit in the AWS number tells you the compatible polarity. As a quick reference: E6010 = DCEP only; E6011 = DCEP, DCEN, or AC; E6013 = DCEP, DCEN, or AC; E7018 = DCEP (primary), AC (some formulations); E7024 = DCEP, DCEN, or AC; E8018, E9018 = DCEP only; stainless 308L\/309L\/316L = DCEP. When in doubt, DCEP (electrode positive, work negative) is the safe default for most iron-based electrodes — it provides good penetration and stable arc characteristics across most classifications.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-q\"\u003eWhat is the Lincoln Excalibur 7018 MR and what does MR mean?\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-a\"\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018 MR is Lincoln Electric's premium low-hydrogen E7018 electrode for structural and pressure-vessel code work. \"MR\" stands for Moisture Resistant — a Lincoln-specific designation indicating that the electrode coating includes a proprietary moisture-resistant binder system that slows the rate at which the coating absorbs atmospheric humidity after the container is opened. A standard 7018 may need to return to the holding oven after 2–4 hours of ambient exposure; Excalibur 7018 MR tolerates approximately 9 hours of ambient exposure while maintaining H4R (≤4 mL\/100g) diffusible hydrogen compliance. This is valuable on construction sites where rod ovens are not always accessible. The H4R designation meets the strictest low-hydrogen requirements of AWS D1.1 Table 4.1.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-item\"\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-q\"\u003eWhat welding rod is best for structural steel?\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"lm-faq-a\"\u003eFor AWS D1.1 structural steel welding, E7018 (Lincoln Excalibur 7018 MR) is the industry standard for most groove welds and fillet welds on A36, A572, and common structural shapes. It meets pre-qualified status under D1.1, provides the required 70 ksi tensile strength, and delivers the low-hydrogen chemistry needed to prevent cracking in restrained joints. For flat\/horizontal production fillet welds in a controlled fabrication shop environment, E7028 (Lincoln Jetweld LH-70) is an alternative with higher deposition rates while still meeting D1.1 low-hydrogen requirements. For higher-strength steels (A514, A517, A913 Grade 65), move to E8018 or E9018 electrodes matched to the higher yield strength of the base metal.\u003c\/div\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is 7018 used for?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"E7018 is the standard electrode for structural steel welding under AWS D1.1, ASME pressure vessel codes, and bridge fabrication. Its low-hydrogen iron-powder coating produces weld deposits with minimum 72,000 psi tensile strength, good Charpy impact toughness at -20°F, and diffusible hydrogen content below 8 mL\/100g (H4R grade below 4 mL\/100g). It is used in structural shapes, heavy plate, columns, beams, and everywhere an X-ray-quality weld with documented hydrogen control is required. Lincoln trade name: Excalibur 7018 MR.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the difference between 6011 and 6013?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"E6011 is a high-cellulose electrode with a forceful, digging arc and fast-freeze slag that handles dirty, rusty, and contaminated metal in all positions — used for field repair and AC machine work. E6013 is a titania-coated beginner rod with a soft arc and fluid weld pool ideal for clean, light-gauge sheet metal. E6013 cannot tolerate contaminated surfaces. Use E6011 for field work and dirty metal; use E6013 for thin clean sheet metal and learning.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"7018 vs 6010 — which should I use?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"E6010 is a high-cellulose DCEP-only rod used for root pass welding on pipe and dirty metal. E7018 is a low-hydrogen iron-powder rod used for fill\/cap passes and structural code welding requiring hydrogen control. On pipeline work, the standard procedure is E6010 root, then E7018 fill and cap. In structural fabrication, E7018 is used throughout. Choose E6010 for pipe root and dirty metal; choose E7018 for structural code work and fill passes.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the best stick welding rod for beginners?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"For beginners on a DC machine, E6013 (Lincoln Fleetweld 37) is easiest: soft arc, easy to strike, minimal spatter, and clean slag removal. For AC-only machines (like a Lincoln AC-225), E6011 (Fleetweld 180) is better because it performs more consistently at lower AC amperages and tolerates arc-length variation. Avoid E6010 as a beginner rod — its forceful DC-only arc is harder to control.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I run 6010 on an AC welder?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No. E6010 uses a high-cellulose sodium coating that cannot stabilize the arc through AC zero crossings. Use E6011 instead on AC machines — its potassium-based coating re-ignites reliably and delivers similar penetration and all-position capability. E6010 requires DCEP from a rectifier or inverter welder.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I store E7018 low-hydrogen electrodes?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Store E7018 in a rod oven at 250–300°F after opening the original sealed container. Moisture absorption causes hydrogen-induced cold cracking in the weld deposit. Lincoln Excalibur 7018 MR tolerates approximately 9 hours of ambient exposure before re-baking is required. Standard 7018 should return to the oven after 2–4 hours. Re-bake at 700–800°F for 1 hour if rods have been left out overnight, no more than twice.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What does the E in E7018 stand for?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The E stands for electrode. In AWS designation E7018: E = shielded metal arc welding electrode; 70 = minimum 70,000 psi tensile strength; 1 = all-position; 8 = low-hydrogen iron-powder coating, DCEP or AC. H4R suffix means moisture-resistant, ≤4 mL\/100g diffusible hydrogen.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How do I know what polarity to use for stick welding?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Check the electrode's AWS designation: E6010 = DCEP only; E6011 = DCEP, DCEN, or AC; E6013 = DCEP, DCEN, or AC; E7018 = DCEP primary; E8018\/E9018 = DCEP only; stainless 308L\/309L\/316L = DCEP. When in doubt, DCEP (electrode positive, work negative) is the safe default for most iron-based stick electrodes.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the Lincoln Excalibur 7018 MR and what does MR mean?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"MR stands for Moisture Resistant — a Lincoln-specific designation for Excalibur 7018 MR, indicating a moisture-resistant binder system that extends ambient exposure tolerance to approximately 9 hours while maintaining H4R (≤4 mL\/100g) diffusible hydrogen compliance. Standard 7018 needs to return to the oven after 2–4 hours of exposure. Excalibur 7018 MR meets the strictest requirements of AWS D1.1 Table 4.1.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What welding rod is best for structural steel?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"E7018 (Lincoln Excalibur 7018 MR) is the industry standard for AWS D1.1 structural steel — meets pre-qualified status, provides 70 ksi tensile strength, and delivers low-hydrogen chemistry for cracking prevention. For flat\/horizontal production fillet welds, E7028 (Jetweld LH-70) offers higher deposition rates while meeting D1.1 requirements. For high-strength steels (A514, A517), use E8018 or E9018 matching the higher yield strength.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExpand your process arsenal: \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/welding-wire\"\u003eWelding Wire \u0026amp; Consumables\u003c\/a\u003e for GMAW and FCAW, \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/tig-welders\"\u003eTIG Welders (GTAW)\u003c\/a\u003e for precision work on stainless or aluminum, and \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/welding-generators-and-engine-driven-welders-portable\"\u003eEngine-Driven Welders \u0026amp; Generators\u003c\/a\u003e for remote stick welding on structural steel. Top electrode brands: \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/lincoln-electric\"\u003eLincoln Electric Welders \u0026amp; Supplies\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/harris-products-group\"\u003eHarris Products Group\u003c\/a\u003e. See all categories at \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/welding-supplies-machines-equipment\"\u003eAll Welding Machines \u0026amp; Supplies\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eRelated Categories\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul class=\"related-categories\"\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/welding-supplies-machines-equipment\"\u003eAll Welding Machines \u0026amp; Supplies\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/welding-wire\"\u003eWelding Wire \u0026amp; Consumables\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/tig-welders\"\u003eTIG Welders (GTAW)\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/welding-generators-and-engine-driven-welders-portable\"\u003eEngine-Driven Welders \u0026amp; Generators\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/lincoln-electric\"\u003eLincoln Electric Welders \u0026amp; Supplies\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/harris-products-group\"\u003eHarris Products Group\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n","products":[{"product_id":"lincoln-electric-part-smaw-electrode-l15200-9","title":"Lincoln OEM - SMAW ELECTRODE - L15200-9 - 9SL15200-9","description":"\u003cp\u003eLincoln OEM SMAW ELECTRODE L15200-9 - 9SL15200-9\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e⚠️ Made-to-Order Item\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThis product is custom made to order and is non-cancelable, non-returnable, and non-refundable. Please verify all specifications before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43637999861911,"sku":"9SL15200-9","price":153.92,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-smaw-electrode-l15200-9-lincoln-electric.png?v=1765595646"},{"product_id":"harris-310-16-stainless-stick-smaw-welding-rod-1-8-x-14-x-10-3101660","title":"Harris 310-16 Stainless Stick Rod 1\/8 x 14 10 lb","description":"\u003ch2\u003eHarris 310-16 Stainless Steel Stick Electrode — What Is E310-16?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHarris 310-16\u003c\/strong\u003e (1\/8 x 14 in, 10 lb box \/ catalog 3101660) is an \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E310-16\u003c\/strong\u003e fully austenitic stainless steel SMAW electrode for ultra-high-temperature service and severe oxidizing atmospheres on \u003cstrong\u003eDC+ (DCEP)\u003c\/strong\u003e in all positions. With a nominal composition of 25–28% Cr and 20–22% Ni, Type 310 is the highest-alloy commonly stocked austenitic stainless electrode — providing exceptional oxidation resistance at temperatures up to 2100°F (1150°C) and far superior high-temperature strength compared to Types 304, 308, 309, and 316. Harris 310-16 is the electrode for furnace walls, kiln furniture, flue ducts, radiant tubes, heat treating fixtures, and petrochemical heater applications where service temperatures exceed the capability of 309 or lower-alloy stainless grades.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable style=\"min-width: 50px\"\u003e\n\u003ccolgroup\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003c\/colgroup\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E310-16\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eCoating type\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eLime\/titania (-16 type)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003ePolarity\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eDC+ (DCEP) preferred; AC acceptable\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAll positions (F, H, V, OH)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWeld metal Cr content\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e25.0–28.0% Cr (exceptional oxidation resistance)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWeld metal Ni content\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e20.0–22.5% Ni (fully austenitic deposit)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMax service temperature\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e~2100°F (1150°C) continuous; ~2200°F (1205°C) intermittent\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin tensile strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e80,000 psi (552 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin yield strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e62,000 psi (428 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eElongation\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e30% minimum\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003ePackage size\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e10 lb box\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e1\/8 in: 60–100 A\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris Products Group\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E310-16\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for Harris 310-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFurnace and kiln fabrication:\u003c\/strong\u003e Radiant tubes, furnace walls, muffle furnaces, vacuum furnace components, and kiln furniture operating at continuous temperatures of 1800–2100°F where no other common stainless grade performs adequately\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeat treating fixtures and baskets:\u003c\/strong\u003e Fixtures for annealing, carburizing, and nitriding furnaces that cycle repeatedly through high temperatures where 309 stainless fatigues due to thermal cycling and oxidation\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFlue ducts and stack components:\u003c\/strong\u003e High-temperature flue gas handling where the combination of heat and oxidizing\/sulfurizing atmosphere demands maximum chromium content for sulfidation resistance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePetrochemical fired heater tubes and components:\u003c\/strong\u003e Reformer furnace hardware, cracking heater components, and radiant section fixtures in refinery fired heaters\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWelding Type 310 and 310S stainless base metal:\u003c\/strong\u003e Matched-composition repair and fabrication of existing Type 310\/310S stainless steel equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNuclear and defense applications:\u003c\/strong\u003e High-temperature structural applications in nuclear plants and defense equipment where the fully austenitic microstructure and radiation tolerance of 310 stainless are specified\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Harris 310-16 (Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position)\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAmperage:\u003c\/strong\u003e 60–100 A for 1\/8 in on DC+. Low heat input reduces hot cracking risk in fully austenitic 310 deposits. 310 stainless has no delta ferrite in the microstructure — fully austenitic deposits are more sensitive to hot cracking than duplex austenitic\/ferritic deposits. Stringer beads only.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHot cracking sensitivity:\u003c\/strong\u003e Type 310 weld metal is fully austenitic with virtually no ferrite — this means it is more prone to hot cracking (solidification cracking) than 308L or 309L deposits that contain ferrite. Minimize heat input, use stringer beads, control interpass temperature below 200°F (93°C) if possible, and avoid highly restrained joint designs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity:\u003c\/strong\u003e DC+ (DCEP) for best arc stability. AC acceptable per -16 designation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHigh-temperature preheat:\u003c\/strong\u003e For repair of service-aged 310 stainless at high temperature, allow components to cool slowly before welding and follow the applicable code for preheat if required. Thermal shock on hot stainless components causes cracking.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBack step and intermittent welding:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use back-step technique and intermittent welding sequences to reduce heat buildup in the joint. Allow cooling between passes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore in sealed original packaging in dry conditions; separate from carbon steel electrodes\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eDry at 300–400°F (150–200°C) for 1 hour if moisture exposure has occurred\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis 10 lb box size is suitable for both production and MRO applications\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrimary base metals:\u003c\/strong\u003e Type 310, 310S austenitic stainless steel; also acceptable for 309\/309S when E310 overmatching is specified for the application service temperature\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot for standard 304\/316 service:\u003c\/strong\u003e E310-16 is overmatched for standard food, chemical, or structural 304\/316 stainless — use E308L or E316L instead; E310-16 costs significantly more and provides no benefit at service temperatures below 1400°F\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint types:\u003c\/strong\u003e All groove and fillet configurations per ASME Section IX and AWS D1.6, with awareness of hot cracking sensitivity in restrained joints\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Harris 310-16 Stainless\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is E310-16 welding rod used for?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris 310-16 (E310-16) is used for ultra-high-temperature applications including furnace fabrication, kiln equipment, heat treating fixtures, radiant tubes, flue ducts, and petrochemical heater components where service temperatures of 1800–2100°F exceed the capability of Type 309 stainless. It is also the matched filler for welding Type 310 and 310S base metal.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat temperature can E310 stainless handle?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eType 310\/310S stainless and E310 weld deposits maintain adequate oxidation resistance at continuous service temperatures up to approximately 2100°F (1150°C) and can tolerate intermittent excursions to 2200°F (1205°C). Above these temperatures, nickel-base alloys are required. Below approximately 1400°F, Type 309 stainless is generally sufficient and more cost-effective than Type 310.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the difference between E309 and E310 stainless electrodes?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eE309 deposits contain ~23% Cr \/ 13% Ni; E310 deposits contain 25–28% Cr \/ 20–22% Ni. The higher alloy content of E310 provides superior oxidation resistance and hot-strength above approximately 2000°F. E309 is the standard for dissimilar metal welding and most high-temperature applications. E310 is reserved for extreme temperature service, Type 310 base metal, and applications where E309's oxidation resistance is insufficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIs E310 fully austenitic?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes — Type 310 weld metal is fully austenitic with essentially no delta ferrite. This provides excellent high-temperature ductility but means hot cracking sensitivity is higher than for duplex austenitic\/ferritic deposits (E308L, E309L). Low heat input, stringer beads, and controlled interpass temperature are essential to prevent solidification cracking in E310 deposits.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCan E310-16 be used for dissimilar metal welding?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, though E309L is more commonly specified for standard dissimilar stainless-to-carbon steel joints. E310-16 may be used for dissimilar joints when the service temperature exceeds E309's capability, or when the WPS specifies E310 overmatching for the specific application. The higher cost of E310 versus E309L makes the latter the standard choice for routine dissimilar metal work.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat does 3101660 mean in the product number?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris product number 3101660 identifies this as the E310-16 specification (310-16) in 1\/8 in diameter, 14 in length, 10 lb box packaging. Harris catalog numbers incorporate the AWS classification, diameter, and pack size into a structured numeric code.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDoes E310 stainless need post-weld heat treatment?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ePost-weld heat treatment of E310 deposits is generally not performed in the same sense as for carbon steel (stress relief PWHT). For high-temperature service, solution annealing at 1900–2050°F (1038–1121°C) followed by water quench or rapid cooling may be performed to restore optimal ductility and corrosion resistance in the weld and HAZ if the joint geometry permits. For field repairs, as-welded condition is typical. Consult the applicable ASME or AWS code for your specific application requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse all stick electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/harris-309-16-stainless-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eHarris 309-16\u003c\/a\u003e for standard high-temperature and dissimilar metal applications, or \u003ca href=\"\/products\/harris-309l-stainless-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eHarris 309L\u003c\/a\u003e for low-carbon dissimilar welding in corrosion service.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOrdering Harris E310-16 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris E310-16 stainless welding rods ship from WeldingMart — add this product to your cart to place your order. We stock E310-16 for high-temperature stainless and dissimilar-metal applications in power generation, heat treating, and furnace fabrication. Create a WeldingMart account to track your order and maintain a product history for purchasing and inventory management. In-stock orders ship same day. E310-16 is a specialty stainless electrode; we maintain stock specifically to serve professional fabricators who need this product on demand. Review your order at checkout to confirm electrode diameter and package quantity before completing your purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include furnace parts. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include furnace parts. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E310-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E310-16 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E310-16 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E310-16 include: electrode 1, stainless steel, e310 16, 310 16, stainless steel electrode, analysis, clad, usa, tensile strength. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E310-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E310-16 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E310-16 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E310-16 include: electrode 1, e310 16, 310 16, stainless steel, stainless steel electrode, analysis, clad, usa. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E310-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E310-16 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E310-16 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E310-16 include: electrode 1, e310 16, 310 16, stainless steel electrode. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Harris","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44258829172887,"sku":"3101660","price":226.85,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/harris-310-16-stainless-stick-smaw-welding-rod-18-x-14-x-10-3101660-harris-1.jpg?v=1753396796"},{"product_id":"lincoln-503609-2-conarc-48","title":"Lincoln 503609-2 Conarc 48","description":"\u003ch3\u003eLincoln 503609-2 Conarc 48\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Lincoln 503609-2 Conarc 48 is a premium welding electrode designed for versatile welding applications. This professional-grade welding consumable provides reliable arc stability and excellent weld quality, making it ideal for industrial fabrication, structural steel work, and manufacturing processes requiring dependable welding solutions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Conarc 48 electrode features high-quality construction and precision manufacturing for consistent performance in demanding welding environments. The professional-grade design ensures proper weld penetration while maintaining excellent mechanical properties, providing reliable functionality with the specific parameters required for specialized industrial welding applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch4\u003eKey features\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePremium-grade welding electrode\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExcellent arc stability\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConsistent weld quality\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuperior mechanical properties\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVersatile application range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLow spatter performance\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSmooth bead appearance\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProper penetration characteristics\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIndustry-standard compatibility\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProfessional-grade quality\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEasy slag removal\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAll-position welding capability\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":45224749269143,"sku":"503609-2","price":137.09,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-503609-2-conarc-48.jpg?v=1753387099"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-8018-c3-mr-3-32-x-14-in-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 8018-C3 MR 3\/32 x 14 in SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-8018-c3-mr-3-32-x-14-in-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 8018-C3 MR\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.5\/A5.5M E8018-C3 SMAW stick electrode family with 80 ksi minimum tensile and DC+ or AC, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 12 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Excalibur 8018-C3 MR\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE8018-C3 is an AWS A5.5 low-alloy low-hydrogen SMAW electrode with 80 ksi minimum tensile and a 1.0% nickel addition for moderate low-temperature toughness. Common applications include weathering steels (ASTM A588), bridge fabrication, and structural service to -40 F. Runs DC+ or AC in all positions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E8018-C3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ or AC, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Excalibur 8018-C3 MR from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638116974743,"sku":"ED032600","price":197.28,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638054748311,"sku":"ED030893","price":313.69,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (Buy America)","offer_id":43638117597335,"sku":"ED034040","price":366.79,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED034041)","offer_id":43638118350999,"sku":"ED034041","price":308.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED030894)","offer_id":43638056190103,"sku":"ED030894","price":313.09,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638056419479,"sku":"ED030895","price":338.43,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (Buy America)","offer_id":43638118940823,"sku":"ED034042","price":372.01,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED034315)","offer_id":43638126411927,"sku":"ED034315","price":374.24,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED030897)","offer_id":43638058156183,"sku":"ED030897","price":277.65,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638115565719,"sku":"ED032599","price":219.73,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638054584471,"sku":"ED030892","price":352.64,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (Buy America)","offer_id":43638117105815,"sku":"ED034039","price":401.81,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed032600-excalibur-8018-c3-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod-18x14-in-3-10-lb-easy-open-cans-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594448"},{"product_id":"harris-is-e6013-mild-steel-1-8-x-14-in-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Harris E6013 Mild Steel 1\/8 x 14 in SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003ch2\u003eHarris E6013 Mild Steel Stick Electrode — What Is E6013?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHarris E6013\u003c\/strong\u003e (1\/8 x 14 in) is an \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E6013\u003c\/strong\u003e rutile-coated SMAW electrode delivering 60 ksi minimum tensile strength on \u003cstrong\u003eAC, DC+, or DC− power\u003c\/strong\u003e in all welding positions. The high-titania (rutile) coating produces a smooth, quiet arc with minimal spatter, a fluid weld puddle, and self-releasing slag — making Harris E6013 the most accessible and beginner-friendly stick electrode in the AWS A5.1 specification. Unlike cellulosic E6010\/E6011 and low-hydrogen E7018 electrodes, E6013 runs on virtually any welding machine type, provides an easy arc start, and delivers clean bead appearance with virtually no technique barrier. This 1\/8 in diameter, 14-inch rod is WeldingMart's standard Harris 6013 offering for light structural, fabrication, and welding training applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable style=\"min-width: 50px\"\u003e\n\u003ccolgroup\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003c\/colgroup\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E6013\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eCoating type\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eRutile (high-titania)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003ePolarity\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAC, DC+ (DCEP), or DC− (DCEN)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAll positions: 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G (flat, horizontal, vertical, overhead)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eRod dimensions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e1\/8 in diameter × 14 in length\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMinimum tensile strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e60,000 psi (414 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMinimum yield strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e48,000 psi (331 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eElongation\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e17% minimum\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e1\/8 in: 70–120 A (AC or DC)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris Products Group\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E6013\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for Harris E6013 1\/8 in\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLight structural fabrication:\u003c\/strong\u003e Gates, fences, frames, brackets, and general mild steel structures where code certification is not required and bead appearance matters\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWelding education and training:\u003c\/strong\u003e The universal first electrode for welding schools — all-polarity, easy start, self-releasing slag, and forgiving technique requirements make 6013 the lowest-barrier learning electrode\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSheet metal and thin plate:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1\/8 in thickness and lighter, where the fluid puddle and reduced penetration of E6013 are advantages rather than drawbacks\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFarm welding on AC machines:\u003c\/strong\u003e Runs reliably on AC transformer welders (farm buzzboxes) without DC requirement\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance and repair of clean mild steel:\u003c\/strong\u003e Non-code repair where appearance and ease of use are the priorities\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHobby and home shop welding:\u003c\/strong\u003e The ideal electrode for home welders who want clean, presentable beads on thin-to-medium mild steel with minimal setup\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Harris E6013 (Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position)\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAmperage for 1\/8 in:\u003c\/strong\u003e 70–120 A on AC or DC. Start at 90–100 A for most applications; increase for thicker material, decrease for thin sheet or overhead. The rutile arc is forgiving of moderate amperage variation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity:\u003c\/strong\u003e All three polarities (AC, DC+, DC−) produce acceptable results. DC+ provides slightly deeper penetration; DC− produces a softer arc with less penetration (good for thin material). AC is fully acceptable and common on farm welders.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eArc length:\u003c\/strong\u003e Slightly longer arc than E7018 — approximately 1–1.5× rod diameter is acceptable with the rutile coating. The fluid slag shields the pool effectively at moderate arc lengths.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTravel angle:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5–15° drag (push slightly for vertical-up). Consistent travel speed produces flat, uniform beads with minimal spatter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSlag removal:\u003c\/strong\u003e One of the easiest slags in stick welding — often self-releasing as the joint cools. Light chipping and wire brushing for multi-pass or high-appearance welds.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVertical welding:\u003c\/strong\u003e No special weave required — a steady, upward progression with slight pause works well for vertical-up on 1\/8 in plate at appropriate amperage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris E6013 is a rutile electrode — \u003cstrong\u003eno oven storage required\u003c\/strong\u003e:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore in original packaging in a dry location at ambient temperature\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eOven storage damages the coating — never place E6013 in a low-hydrogen holding oven\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf exposed to moisture, air-dry at room temperature before use\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eSealed original packaging provides adequate protection for long-term storage\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBase metals:\u003c\/strong\u003e ASTM A36, A572 (Grade 36\/50), mild steel sheet and plate, low-carbon structural steel; not recommended for higher-carbon or alloy steels requiring low-hydrogen deposits\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint types:\u003c\/strong\u003e Butt joints, fillet welds, lap joints, T-joints on mild steel up to approximately 3\/8 in thickness where full-penetration groove welds are not structurally required\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e Structural code welding where low hydrogen is specified (use E7018), contaminated or heavily rusted metal (use E6011), stainless steel, cast iron, or high-carbon steel\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Harris E6013\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is Harris E6013 used for?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris E6013 1\/8 in is used for light structural fabrication, welding training, thin-plate mild steel, farm welding, and maintenance welding where appearance and ease of use matter more than high strength or code compliance. It is the most beginner-friendly stick electrode in the AWS A5.1 family.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the difference between E6013 and E7018?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eE7018 provides 70 ksi tensile strength, a low-hydrogen coating, and is required for AWS D1.1 structural code welding. E6013 provides 60 ksi tensile strength with a rutile coating that is easier to run but has higher hydrogen and is not the first choice for structural code welds. For training and light fabrication, E6013 is ideal. For structural or pressure-critical welds, E7018 is specified.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the difference between Harris E6013 and Harris 6013 (regular)?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris E6013 IS the standard E6013 classification. The \"IS\" prefix in the handle indicates the International Standard product designation used by Harris internally. Both products meet AWS A5.1\/A5.1M E6013 and are interchangeable in application. This 1\/8 x 14 in rod is the standard single-pass and multi-pass diameter for general fabrication.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCan E6013 be used on AC machines?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes — E6013 is one of the best electrodes for AC-only welding machines including farm buzzboxes, low-OCV inverters, and older transformer welders. The rutile coating ionizes well at AC frequency, providing a stable, easy-starting arc without the DC requirement of E6010 or the demanding technique of E7018 on AC.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat amperage do I use for 1\/8 inch 6013?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor 1\/8 in E6013, use 70–120 A depending on position and base metal thickness. A starting point of 90–100 A works well for most flat and horizontal positions on 3\/16 – 1\/4 in mild steel. Reduce to 70–80 A for thin sheet metal or overhead position; increase to 110–120 A for flat position on heavier plate (3\/8 in and up).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIs E6013 or E6011 better for rusty metal?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eE6011 is significantly better for rusty, scaled, or contaminated metal. The deep-penetrating cellulosic arc of E6011 burns through surface oxidation that would cause porosity in E6013's rutile deposit. Use E6013 on clean or lightly scaled mild steel for best results; use E6011 where surface preparation is not possible.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCan I weld structural steel with E6013?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris E6013 is prequalified under AWS A5.1 and can be used for fillet welds and certain groove weld configurations. However, it is not the first choice for primary structural members where AWS D1.1 calls for low-hydrogen electrodes (E7018 class). E6013 is fully acceptable for secondary structural members, gussets, connection plates, and non-primary welds as permitted by the applicable welding procedure specification.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse all stick electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — or compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/harris-e7018-mild-steel-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eHarris E7018\u003c\/a\u003e for structural code welding, or \u003ca href=\"\/products\/harris-e6011-mild-steel-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eHarris E6011\u003c\/a\u003e for deep-penetrating cellulosic welding on rough metal.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOrdering Harris E6013 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris E6013 welding rods ship from WeldingMart — add this product to your cart to place your order. We stock Harris E6013 in both small and contractor-pack quantities so you can order the right amount for your project. Create a WeldingMart account to track your order, manage your product history, and reorder without re-entering information. In-stock orders ship the same day. Check current stock availability on this product page; if your required quantity is listed, it is ready to ship. Order Harris E6013 in bulk to reduce per-rod costs for production and training applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include 1 8. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include 1 8. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E6013\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E6013 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E6013 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-purchasing\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eHow to Purchase Harris E6013 at WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWeldingMart ships Harris E6013 from our warehouse with fast processing. This product ships in the original manufacturer packaging to ensure electrode integrity during transit. Each product order ships with a manufacturer lot number for traceability. Add the correct diameter to your cart — select the product variant (1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in) before you add to cart.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHow to add to cart:\u003c\/strong\u003e Select your preferred diameter and package size, then add the product to your cart. Review your cart to confirm the correct product variant and quantity before checkout.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThis product ships:\u003c\/strong\u003e Harris E6013 ships from our Wisconsin warehouse. Standard orders ship same day when placed by our daily order cutoff. Expedited shipping is available at checkout.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStock availability:\u003c\/strong\u003e Current stock levels are shown on this product page. Add to cart to reserve your quantity — stock is not held until you complete your order.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOrder tracking:\u003c\/strong\u003e After you place your order, create an account or log in to your existing account to track order status, view order history, and manage reorders.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAccount benefits:\u003c\/strong\u003e Your WeldingMart account stores your order history and shipping preferences, making it easy to add repeat products to cart without re-entering information.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBulk orders:\u003c\/strong\u003e For large quantity orders of this product, add the desired quantity to cart and complete checkout — our system handles bulk order processing automatically. Contact us before ordering pallet quantities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReturn policy:\u003c\/strong\u003e This product is eligible for return within 30 days if unopened and in original packaging. Contact our team before returning any product to obtain a return authorization number.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThis product ships with tracking. Once your order ships, you will receive a shipping confirmation with tracking information. Check your account order history for the latest shipment status on all orders. If you need to add additional products to your order, add them to cart before checkout — orders cannot be modified after they ship.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E6013 include: tube, lb tube, electrode, general purpose, stick smaw, rods, smaw, x 14, position, shop, good, mild steel. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E6013\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E6013 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E6013 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E6013 include: tube, lb tube, general purpose, stick smaw, rods, x 14, smaw, pressure vessel fittings, galvanized steel, steel electrode, fill, piping. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E6013\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E6013 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E6013 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E6013 include: lb tube, tube, general purpose, stick smaw, rods, boilers, vehicles, harris 6013, stick welding, shop, good, pressure vessel fittings. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Harris","offers":[{"title":"5 lb Tube","offer_id":44258846965911,"sku":"6013605","price":42.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"10 lb Tube","offer_id":44258852044951,"sku":"60136010","price":35.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/harris-6013-stick-smaw-welding-rod-18-10-box-60136010-harris-1.jpg?v=1753396064"},{"product_id":"harris-e7014-mild-steel-1-8-x-14-in-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Harris E7014 Mild Steel 1\/8 x 14 in SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003ch2\u003eHarris E7014 Mild Steel Stick Electrode — What Is E7014?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHarris E7014\u003c\/strong\u003e (1\/8 x 14 in) is an \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7014\u003c\/strong\u003e iron powder \/ rutile-coated SMAW electrode delivering 70 ksi minimum tensile strength on \u003cstrong\u003eAC, DC+, or DC− power\u003c\/strong\u003e in all welding positions. Often called \"7014\" or \"iron powder 7018 for AC,\" E7014 bridges the gap between the easy-running E6013 and the structurally demanding E7018 — it provides 70 ksi tensile strength like E7018 with the smoother, more forgiving arc of a rutile electrode. The iron powder coating delivers a high deposition rate (higher than E6013, approaching E7018) with less technique sensitivity and no oven storage requirements. Harris E7014 is the practical choice for fabrication shops that need 70 ksi deposits on AC machines or prefer the ease of rutile slag over the discipline of E7018's low-hydrogen handling requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable style=\"min-width: 50px\"\u003e\n\u003ccolgroup\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003c\/colgroup\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7014\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eCoating type\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eIron powder \/ rutile (titania)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003ePolarity\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAC, DC+ (DCEP), or DC− (DCEN)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAll positions: F, H, V, OH\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eRod dimensions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e1\/8 in × 14 in\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin tensile strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e70,000 psi (483 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin yield strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e58,000 psi (400 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eElongation\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e17% minimum\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eDeposition rate\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eHigher than E6013 due to iron powder addition\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e1\/8 in: 80–140 A (AC or DC)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris Products Group\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7014\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for Harris E7014\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStructural fabrication requiring 70 ksi on AC machines:\u003c\/strong\u003e Applications where E7018's DC requirement or oven storage is impractical, but where 60 ksi E6013 tensile strength is insufficient — E7014 provides 70 ksi on AC\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLight structural steel fabrication:\u003c\/strong\u003e Frames, gussets, and connections on A36\/A572 steel where appearance and 70 ksi strength both matter\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHigh-deposition fill passes on flat or horizontal:\u003c\/strong\u003e The iron powder addition increases deposition rate — useful for flat and horizontal multi-pass welds where productivity matters\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShops with older AC equipment:\u003c\/strong\u003e Fabrication shops running older Lincoln Idealarc or similar AC transformer welders that cannot produce quality DC welds with E7018\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGalvanized steel at 70 ksi:\u003c\/strong\u003e Where E7018's moisture sensitivity limits use on coated steel, E7014 provides 70 ksi without the same storage demands\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Harris E7014 (Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position)\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAmperage for 1\/8 in:\u003c\/strong\u003e 80–140 A on AC or DC. Use 80–100 A for vertical and overhead; 110–140 A for flat and horizontal fill passes. Iron powder coating allows slightly higher amperage than equivalent E6013 for same diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity:\u003c\/strong\u003e AC, DC+, or DC− all acceptable. DC+ gives slightly deeper penetration; DC− reduces penetration and is appropriate for thin material. AC is fully compatible for all three polarities.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eArc length:\u003c\/strong\u003e Moderate arc length — same as E6013, approximately 1–1.5× rod diameter. Not as arc-length sensitive as E7018. The rutile slag provides effective shielding at moderate arc lengths.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSlag removal:\u003c\/strong\u003e Easier than E7018 — the rutile\/iron-powder slag releases well. Self-releasing on good passes; light chipping for the remainder. No redrying concerns between passes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNo oven storage required:\u003c\/strong\u003e Unlike E7018, Harris E7014 does not require a holding oven. Store in original packaging in a dry location — significantly simpler logistics than low-hydrogen electrode management.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo holding oven required — store in original packaging in dry conditions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf exposed to moisture, air-dry at room temperature or dry at 200–250°F for 1 hour before use\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eDo not bake at E7018 oven temperatures — this damages the rutile coating\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eOriginal sealed packaging provides adequate protection for normal storage durations\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBase metals:\u003c\/strong\u003e ASTM A36, A572 (Grades 36, 50), A53 pipe, A106 pipe, and similar mild to medium-carbon steels up to 0.35% C\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint types:\u003c\/strong\u003e Butt joints (V and flat grooves), fillet welds, lap joints, and T-joints on mild steel per AWS D1.1; E7014 is prequalified for many structural joint configurations\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e Code structural work where low-hydrogen (E7018) is specifically required by the WPS, stainless steel, cast iron, or high-alloy steels\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Harris E7014\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is E7014 welding rod used for?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris E7014 is used for 70 ksi mild steel fabrication where AC machine compatibility and easy slag handling are needed. It is the high-strength alternative to E6013 for shops running AC-only welding machines, providing 70 ksi tensile strength with rutile-electrode ease and no oven storage requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the difference between E7018 and E7014?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth E7018 and E7014 produce 70 ksi minimum tensile strength. E7018 uses a low-hydrogen iron powder coating that requires oven storage and produces lower diffusible hydrogen — mandated by structural codes. E7014 uses a rutile\/iron-powder coating that is easier to run, requires no oven storage, and accepts AC, DC+, or DC−, but has higher hydrogen than E7018 and is not a substitute for E7018 in code-critical applications requiring low hydrogen designation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCan E7014 be used for structural welding?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eE7014 is AWS D1.1 prequalified for structural fillet and groove welds. However, if the WPS specifies E7018 (low-hydrogen designation), E7014 cannot substitute. For applications where E7018 is not explicitly required and 70 ksi tensile with AC machine compatibility is sufficient, E7014 is structurally acceptable. Always confirm with the applicable WPS and code.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIs E7014 the same as E7018?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Both produce 70 ksi tensile strength, but they differ critically in hydrogen content and storage requirements. E7018 is low-hydrogen (H8 or H4R) and requires oven storage. E7014 is a rutile\/iron-powder electrode with higher hydrogen — simpler to handle but not suitable where low hydrogen is specified. Think of E7014 as the \"AC-friendly 70 ksi alternative\" and E7018 as the \"structural code 70 ksi standard.\"\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat polarity does E7014 use?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris E7014 operates on AC, DC+ (DCEP), and DC− (DCEN). This all-polarity capability is the practical advantage of E7014 over E7018 (which is DC+ preferred). For shops with AC-only machines needing 70 ksi welds, E7014 is the correct choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the amperage for 1\/8 inch E7014?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) Harris E7014, the typical range is 80–140 A. Use 80–100 A for vertical and overhead positions; 110–140 A for flat and horizontal fill passes on heavier sections. The iron powder coating provides a slightly higher deposition rate than equivalent-amperage E6013.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDoes E7014 need to be kept in an oven?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo — E7014 is a rutile\/iron-powder electrode, not a low-hydrogen electrode. Oven storage is not required. Store in original packaging in a dry location. This is one of the key practical advantages of E7014 over E7018 for job sites and mobile welding operations where electrode ovens are inconvenient.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse all stick electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/harris-e7018-mild-steel-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eHarris E7018\u003c\/a\u003e for low-hydrogen structural code welding, or \u003ca href=\"\/products\/harris-is-e6013-mild-steel-1-8-x-14-in-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eHarris E6013\u003c\/a\u003e for light fabrication and training on 60 ksi carbon steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOrdering Harris E7014 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris E7014 welding rods ship from WeldingMart — add this product to your cart to place your order online. We stock E7014 for fabricators and maintenance welders who need a self-releasing slag iron-powder electrode for high-deposition flat and horizontal work. Create a WeldingMart account to track your order and manage reorders of this product. In-stock orders ship same day. Check the current stock level shown on this product page; available quantity updates in real time. For high-volume production orders, we can accommodate bulk E7014 orders — contact WeldingMart before placing a large order to confirm stock and lead time.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include product. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include product. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E7014\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E7014 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E7014 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E7014 include: electrodes, good, mild steel, high deposition, sheet metal, ornamental iron, type electrode, inches, excellent, smooth arc characteristics, good arc stability, iron powder type electrode. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E7014\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E7014 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E7014 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E7014 include: electrodes, good, mild steel, high deposition, sheet metal, ornamental iron, inches, excellent, ornamental iron work, poorly fitted joints, low spatter, type electrode. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E7014\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E7014 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E7014 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E7014 include: electrodes, good, mild steel, high deposition, inches, excellent, sheet metal, smooth arc characteristics, good arc stability, iron powder type electrode, ornamental iron work, poorly fitted joints. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Harris","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in, 5 lb Tube","offer_id":44258850799767,"sku":"7014505","price":19.05,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 5 lb Tube","offer_id":44258850832535,"sku":"7014705","price":24.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 5 lb","offer_id":44258851127447,"sku":"7014605","price":22.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb","offer_id":44258852077719,"sku":"70146010","price":35.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/harris-e7014-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-5-tube-7014505-harris-1.jpg?v=1755126395"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-7018-1-mr-3-32-x-14-in-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR 3\/32 x 14 in SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003ch2\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR 3\/32 in — What Is E7018-1?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR\u003c\/strong\u003e (3\/32 x 14 in) is an \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7018-1 H4R\u003c\/strong\u003e iron powder\/low-hydrogen SMAW electrode with moisture-resistant coating for \u003cstrong\u003eDC+ (DCEP)\u003c\/strong\u003e in all positions. The \"-1\" suffix in E7018-1 is an AWS A5.1 designation specifying \u003cem\u003eenhanced notch toughness\u003c\/em\u003e — a minimum of 20 ft·lbf Charpy V-notch at −50°F, compared to −20°F for standard E7018. This colder impact rating makes Excalibur 7018-1 MR the required electrode for bridges under AWS D1.5, fracture-critical applications, cold climate structures in northern regions, pressure vessels requiring toughness at sub-zero temperatures, and any application where AWS D1.1 or project specifications explicitly designate E7018-1 for low-temperature fracture toughness. The 3\/32 in (2.4 mm) diameter provides precise control for root passes, thin plate, restricted-access joints, and all-position work requiring maximum hydrogen control and enhanced notch toughness simultaneously.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable style=\"min-width: 50px\"\u003e\n\u003ccolgroup\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003c\/colgroup\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7018-1 H4R\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eCoating type\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eIron powder \/ low-hydrogen (moisture-resistant)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eRod diameter\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eRod length\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e14 in (356 mm)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003ePolarity\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eDC+ (DCEP) preferred; AC acceptable\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAll positions: F, H, V, OH\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin tensile strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e70,000 psi (483 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin yield strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e58,000 psi (400 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eElongation\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e22% minimum\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eCharpy V-notch impact (KEY distinction)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e20 ft·lbf at −50°F (vs. −20°F for standard E7018)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMax diffusible hydrogen\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e≤4 mL\/100g (H4 designation)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoisture resistance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eR designation (moisture-resistant coating)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e3\/32 in: 55–90 A\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eLincoln Electric\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7018-1 H4R\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR 3\/32 in\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAWS D1.5 bridge welding (root pass):\u003c\/strong\u003e AWS D1.5 Bridge Welding Code mandates E7018-1 over standard E7018 for fracture-critical tension member welds. The 3\/32 in diameter handles root pass applications in bridge girder CJP groove welds where access is restricted and precise root deposit control is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFracture-critical member (FCM) welding:\u003c\/strong\u003e Any bridge tension member classified as fracture-critical by the engineer of record — the enhanced −50°F Charpy toughness directly addresses the low-temperature brittle fracture risk in FCM applications\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCold climate structural steel:\u003c\/strong\u003e Buildings, bridges, and infrastructure in Alaska, Canada, and northern US states where service temperatures below −20°F require E7018-1 rather than standard E7018 to prevent brittle fracture in seismically or impact-loaded connections\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePressure vessels and piping with sub-zero impact requirements:\u003c\/strong\u003e ASME Section VIII pressure vessels with Charpy impact test requirements at −50°F and below — the -1 designation specifies the appropriate minimum impact energy at these temperatures\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSeismic applications (AWS D1.8):\u003c\/strong\u003e AWS D1.8 Seismic Structural Welding Code often specifies E7018-1 or equivalent for moment connections and other high-ductility-demand joints in seismic regions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRoot pass on high-toughness structural steel:\u003c\/strong\u003e For base metals such as A709 Grade 70W, A588, or A992 in fracture-critical or impact-loaded service, the 3\/32 in 7018-1 provides the optimal root pass with required toughness at the smallest practical electrode diameter\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Excalibur 7018-1 MR 3\/32 in (Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position)\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAmperage for 3\/32 in:\u003c\/strong\u003e 55–90 A on DC+. Same range as Excalibur 7018 XMR 3\/32 in. For root passes in bridge or fracture-critical applications, 65–75 A is typical. For vertical-up, 55–65 A. For flat and horizontal fill, 80–90 A.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity:\u003c\/strong\u003e DC+ (DCEP) only for fracture-critical applications. AC is technically permitted per E7018-1 designation but should not be used for bridge or FCM welding — DC+ ensures best hydrogen control and mechanical properties.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStrict arc length discipline:\u003c\/strong\u003e The H4 designation requires a very short arc — no more than 1× rod diameter (about 3\/32 in). On fracture-critical work, arc length discipline is a process control requirement, not just a technique preference. Any increase in arc length increases diffusible hydrogen and reduces the fracture toughness of the deposit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMinimum interpass temperature for cold weather:\u003c\/strong\u003e For E7018-1 applications in cold climates, preheat is often specified — particularly for ASTM A709 bridge steels. Follow the applicable code preheat table. Minimum interpass temperature maintains preheat through the weld sequence.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRod oven and storage:\u003c\/strong\u003e For bridge and FCM welding, all electrodes must be from sealed containers or holding ovens — in compliance with AWS D1.5 and D1.1 requirements for H4 electrodes. The MR (moisture-resistant) coating provides a safety margin, but code-compliant storage is not negotiable on fracture-critical applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore in sealed original packaging at ambient temperature before opening\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnce opened, store in a holding oven at 250–300°F (121–149°C) — required for all code structural applications\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoisture-resistant (MR) coating extends out-of-oven exposure limits vs. standard E7018-1 without MR designation\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eRedry at 500–800°F (260–427°C) for 1–2 hours if moisture exposure is suspected\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eLabel and segregate E7018-1 from standard E7018 — incorrect electrode use on fracture-critical work is a serious nonconformance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStructural steels for fracture-critical service:\u003c\/strong\u003e A709 Grades 36, 50, 50W, 70W; A36; A572; A588 weathering steel (bridge applications); A992 (wide flange shapes)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePressure vessel steels requiring sub-zero impact testing:\u003c\/strong\u003e A516 with low-temperature impact requirements; A537 Class 1; A633\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint types:\u003c\/strong\u003e Root and fill passes in CJP groove welds on fracture-critical bridge members; all position fillet and groove welds per AWS D1.1 and D1.5 with H4 electrode qualification\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR 3\/32\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is E7018-1 welding rod?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eE7018-1 is an AWS A5.1\/A5.1M classification specifying 70 ksi minimum tensile strength, iron powder\/low-hydrogen coating, all-position capability, AND enhanced notch toughness — minimum 20 ft·lbf Charpy at −50°F. The \"-1\" suffix distinguishes this from standard E7018 (which meets 20 ft·lbf only at −20°F). Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR adds moisture-resistant (MR) coating to this specification for field and bridge welding applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the difference between E7018 and E7018-1?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth E7018 and E7018-1 produce 70 ksi minimum tensile strength and use low-hydrogen iron powder coatings. The single critical difference: E7018-1 is required to provide 20 ft·lbf Charpy V-notch impact at −50°F; standard E7018 meets this requirement only at −20°F. For bridge fracture-critical members (AWS D1.5), cold climate structures, and applications specifying sub-zero toughness, E7018-1 is the correct selection. For standard structural carbon steel work not requiring sub-zero toughness, either E7018 or E7018-1 is acceptable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen is E7018-1 required vs E7018?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eE7018-1 is required when: (1) AWS D1.5 bridge welding code applies and fracture-critical member classification is involved; (2) the WPS or engineering specification explicitly designates E7018-1; (3) the service temperature requires −50°F notch toughness. It is also used when AWS D1.8 seismic code specifies E7018-1 or equivalent. For standard structural steel work per AWS D1.1 without special toughness requirements, E7018 is acceptable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the amperage for 3\/32 inch E7018-1?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor 3\/32 in (2.4 mm) E7018-1 MR, the typical amperage range is 55–90 A. Use 55–65 A for overhead and vertical positions; 65–75 A for general all-position work; 80–90 A for flat or horizontal fill passes on structural steel. This is the same range as 3\/32 in E7018 and E7018 XMR — diameter determines the amperage range, not the -1 toughness designation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCan E7018-1 MR be used on AWS D1.1 general structural work?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes — E7018-1 is an acceptable substitute for E7018 on all AWS D1.1 structural work. The enhanced toughness of -1 designation exceeds the D1.1 minimum requirements. There is no penalty for using E7018-1 on applications that only require E7018 — the higher toughness is simply overspecified but not harmful. Many fabricators standardize on E7018-1 to simplify electrode inventory.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDoes the 3\/32 diameter affect the -1 toughness performance?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo — electrode diameter does not affect the AWS A5.1 mechanical property classification, including Charpy toughness. A 3\/32 in E7018-1 H4R meets the same −50°F Charpy requirement as a 1\/8 in, 5\/32 in, or 3\/16 in E7018-1. Diameter only affects the operating current range, deposition rate, and accessibility in joint configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIs Lincoln 7018-1 MR approved for bridge welding?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR meets AWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7018-1 H4R classification requirements, which qualifies it for use in AWS D1.5 bridge welding applications where E7018-1 H4 electrodes are specified. For specific project applications, confirm that the electrode is qualified under the project's welding procedure specification (WPS) and that the welder is qualified per AWS D1.5 requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse all stick electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-excalibur-7018-xmr-3-32-x-14-in-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eExcalibur 7018 XMR 3\/32\u003c\/a\u003e for standard E7018 H4R performance at the same diameter, or \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-excalibur-7018-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eExcalibur 7018 MR 1\/8 in\u003c\/a\u003e for standard structural work at the most common SMAW diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOrdering Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR welding rods ship from WeldingMart — this product is in stock and available to add to your cart. Place your order online and in-stock items ship same day. Create a WeldingMart account to track order status, manage your product history, and reorder Lincoln Excalibur electrodes quickly for production and project needs. The 7018-1 MR meets the -60°F impact requirements for cold-weather structural applications — confirm this product is the correct grade for your application before adding to cart. For volume orders or project procurement of this Lincoln Electric product, contact WeldingMart to confirm current stock levels and delivery lead times.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include time, read, email, 5 32, 3 32, improve, 1 8, need. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include time, read, email, 5 32, 3 32, improve, 1 8, need. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in to 1\/2 in (4.8–12.7 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat\/horizontal preferred\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR include: electrode, e7018 1, e7018 1 8, stick electrode, welding, weld metal, low hydrogen, metals, customers, review, great, welding rod. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in to 1\/2 in (4.8–12.7 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat\/horizontal preferred\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR include: e7018 1 8, electrode, e7018 1, stick electrode, weld metal, low hydrogen, metals, customers, great, iron powder type, materials, value. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in to 1\/2 in (4.8–12.7 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat\/horizontal preferred\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-1 MR include: e7018 1 8, e7018 1, stick electrode, weld metal, low hydrogen, metals, job, money, trailers, free, ideal, means. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638092562583,"sku":"ED033179","price":156.96,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638115008663,"sku":"ED032592","price":180.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED028702)","offer_id":43638060875927,"sku":"ED028702","price":265.47,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED034309)","offer_id":43638123102359,"sku":"ED034309","price":304.67,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638062907543,"sku":"ED028704","price":265.47,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638064349335,"sku":"ED028706","price":269.94,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":47647591268503,"sku":"ED038369","price":0.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/4 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":47647591301271,"sku":"ED038370","price":253.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638114812055,"sku":"ED032591","price":180.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED028700)","offer_id":43638060187799,"sku":"ED028700","price":270.69,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED034308)","offer_id":43638122152087,"sku":"ED034308","price":322.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed033179-excalibur-7018-1-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-12-in-3-8-lb-easy-open-cans-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594746"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-7018-xmr-3-32-x-14-in-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR 3\/32 x 14 in SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003ch2\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR — What Is E7018 XMR?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR\u003c\/strong\u003e (3\/32 x 14 in) is an \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7018 H4R\u003c\/strong\u003e iron powder\/low-hydrogen SMAW electrode with Lincoln Electric's XMR (Extra Moisture Resistant) coating — the highest-performance moisture-resistant coating in the Excalibur 7018 family. The XMR designation indicates an enhanced moisture-resistant coating beyond the standard MR (Moisture Resistant) designation, providing the most extended out-of-oven exposure time allowed while still meeting H4 hydrogen performance (≤4 mL\/100g diffusible hydrogen). The 3\/32 in (2.4 mm) diameter is the smallest commonly stocked Excalibur 7018 diameter, designed for root pass welding, thin-plate applications, restricted-access joints, and vertical and overhead position work where smaller rod diameter provides better operator control. This combination of 3\/32 diameter, H4R performance, and XMR moisture resistance makes this the most demanding field conditions electrode in the Excalibur 7018 size range.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable style=\"min-width: 50px\"\u003e\n\u003ccolgroup\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003c\/colgroup\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7018 H4R\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eLincoln designation\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eExcalibur 7018 XMR (Extra Moisture Resistant)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eCoating type\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eIron powder \/ low-hydrogen (extra moisture-resistant)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eRod diameter\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eRod length\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e14 in (356 mm)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003ePolarity\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eDC+ (DCEP) preferred; AC acceptable\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAll positions: 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin tensile strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e70,000 psi (483 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin yield strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e58,000 psi (400 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eElongation\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e22% minimum\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMax diffusible hydrogen\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e≤4 mL\/100g (H4 designation)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoisture resistance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eR designation + XMR enhanced moisture resistance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e3\/32 in: 55–90 A\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eLincoln Electric\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7018 H4R\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR 3\/32 in\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRoot pass welding on structural steel:\u003c\/strong\u003e The 3\/32 in diameter provides precise control in tight root openings and restricted-access joints where 1\/8 in is too large. Ideal for root passes in CJP groove welds on structural steel connections.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThin-plate structural welding (3\/16 – 3\/8 in):\u003c\/strong\u003e On thinner steel sections where 1\/8 in E7018 would cause burn-through or excessive heat input, 3\/32 in provides the needed current reduction while maintaining low-hydrogen performance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVertical and overhead code welding:\u003c\/strong\u003e Smaller diameter improves operator control in vertical-up and overhead positions — easier to manage the smaller weld pool while maintaining H4R hydrogen performance for code structural applications\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eField welding with extended rod exposure:\u003c\/strong\u003e The XMR coating provides the most moisture-resistant performance in the Excalibur 7018 family — maximum out-of-oven exposure time for field environments where electrode storage is challenging\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStructural repairs in confined spaces:\u003c\/strong\u003e Smaller diameter and 14 in length provide improved access in confined welds where standard 1\/8 in × 18 in rods are impractical\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSeismic and fracture-critical welds:\u003c\/strong\u003e H4R hydrogen control combined with E7018 structural performance meets the most demanding fracture-critical and seismic application requirements in AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.8\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Excalibur 7018 XMR 3\/32 in (Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position)\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAmperage for 3\/32 in:\u003c\/strong\u003e 55–90 A is the operating range. Start at 65–75 A for all-position work on 3\/16 – 1\/4 in plate. Increase to 80–90 A for flat and horizontal on thicker sections. Reduce to 55–65 A for overhead or thin plate. 3\/32 in requires significantly lower amperage than 1\/8 in — confirm settings before striking the arc.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity:\u003c\/strong\u003e DC+ (DCEP) preferred for maximum penetration and optimal H4 hydrogen performance. AC is acceptable per E7018 designation. For structural code applications, use DC+.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShort arc length:\u003c\/strong\u003e Critical for low-hydrogen performance. Keep arc length at 1× rod diameter (approximately 3\/32 in). The smaller diameter makes arc length control easier to develop than with 1\/8 in electrodes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eXMR out-of-oven advantage:\u003c\/strong\u003e The XMR coating allows extended out-of-oven time beyond standard MR designation — consult the Lincoln Electric product data sheet for the specific extended exposure limits. Even XMR electrodes benefit from holding oven storage on code work.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in vertical-up technique:\u003c\/strong\u003e Z-weave or C-weave at reduced amperage (55–65 A). The smaller puddle of 3\/32 in is easier to control on vertical than 1\/8 in, making this a good choice for welders developing vertical-up technique with E7018.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRoot pass technique:\u003c\/strong\u003e For open-root groove welds, run 3\/32 in at 65–75 A with a tight arc and keyhole technique. The smaller diameter allows the electrode to fit into the root gap and establish fusion on both root faces before filling with larger passes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eXMR advantage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Extended moisture-resistant coating allows significantly longer out-of-oven exposure than standard E7018 or even standard MR designation — the best option for challenging field environments\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore in sealed original packaging at ambient temperature before opening\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnce opened, store in a holding oven at 250–300°F (121–149°C) for all code-critical applications\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor redrying: 500–800°F (260–427°C) for 1–2 hours per Lincoln Electric recommendations\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore separately from non-7018 electrodes to prevent mixing\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBase metals:\u003c\/strong\u003e ASTM A36, A572 (Grade 50, 60), A516, A106 pipe, A53 pipe, and other mild-to-low-alloy structural steels per AWS D1.1 prequalified base metals\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint types:\u003c\/strong\u003e Root passes and fill passes in CJP groove welds, fillet welds, and restricted-access joints where 3\/32 in diameter provides better access than 1\/8 in\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFracture-critical and seismic:\u003c\/strong\u003e H4R classification meets the most stringent hydrogen control requirements for AWS D1.1 fracture-critical work and AWS D1.8 seismic provisions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR 3\/32\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is E7018 XMR welding rod?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR is an E7018 H4R low-hydrogen SMAW electrode with an extra moisture-resistant (XMR) coating — the most moisture-resistant in the Excalibur 7018 family. XMR allows extended out-of-oven time in humid or challenging field environments while maintaining ≤4 mL\/100g diffusible hydrogen for code structural applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the difference between E7018 XMR and E7018 MR?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth XMR and MR provide moisture-resistant coatings that allow extended out-of-oven time compared to standard E7018. XMR (Extra Moisture Resistant) provides a higher level of moisture resistance and longer maximum out-of-oven exposure than standard MR. For applications in very humid, rainy, or exposed field conditions, XMR is the better choice to maintain H4 hydrogen performance over extended exposure periods.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat amperage for 3\/32 inch 7018 electrodes?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor 3\/32 in (2.4 mm) E7018 XMR, the typical amperage range is 55–90 A. Use 55–65 A for overhead and vertical, 65–75 A for general all-position work, and 80–90 A for flat and horizontal on heavier sections. Compared to 1\/8 in E7018 (90–150 A range), the 3\/32 in diameter requires significantly lower amperage — incorrect (too high) amperage will cause excessive penetration and burn-through on thin material.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIs 3\/32 E7018 good for root passes?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes — 3\/32 in E7018 is commonly used for root passes in structural CJP groove welds where the root opening is too tight for 1\/8 in diameter. The smaller diameter fits into the root gap and provides precise control of keyhole formation and root face fusion. The XMR moisture-resistant coating ensures that the root pass achieves H4 hydrogen performance even after extended time out of the holding oven on field applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCan Lincoln 7018 XMR be used without an oven on job sites?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe XMR coating provides significantly extended out-of-oven exposure compared to standard E7018 — making it more practical for field job sites where electrode ovens are inconvenient. However, for code-critical structural work (AWS D1.1, ASME), even XMR electrodes must be stored per the applicable code requirements. Consult the Lincoln Electric product data sheet for specific time-temperature exposure limits for the XMR coating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the smallest diameter Excalibur 7018 available?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018 is available in 3\/32 in (2.4 mm) as the smallest standard diameter — this 3\/32 x 14 in XMR product. Larger diameters in the Excalibur 7018 family include 1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16, and 7\/32 in for progressively thicker material and higher deposition applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDoes E7018 XMR have the same mechanical properties as standard E7018?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes — E7018 XMR is classified as E7018 H4R and meets all AWS A5.1 mechanical property requirements: 70,000 psi minimum tensile, 58,000 psi minimum yield, 22% elongation, and 20 ft·lbf Charpy impact at −20°F. The XMR designation refers to the coating's moisture resistance, not a change in mechanical properties.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse all stick electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-excalibur-7018-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eExcalibur 7018 MR\u003c\/a\u003e for standard moisture-resistant 7018 performance, or \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-excalibur-7018-1-mr-3-32-x-14-in-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eExcalibur 7018-1 MR 3\/32\u003c\/a\u003e for enhanced notch toughness at this same diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOrdering Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis Lincoln Electric product ships from WeldingMart — add Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR to your cart to place your order. The Excalibur XMR is in stock in the 3\/32 in diameter for AWS CWI-qualifying test welds and structural production welding. Create a WeldingMart account to manage your order history and enable fast reorder of this product for ongoing projects. In-stock 7018 XMR orders ship same day. Select your preferred package size from the variant picker before adding to cart. Questions about this product's suitability for certification testing? Our welding specialists can advise before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include read, contact. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include read, contact. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR include: stick, 50 lb, lb easy open, e7018 h4r, mild steel, smooth arc, master carton, e7018 h4r requirement, 0.035 max, 0.30 max, min, moisture pickup. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR include: stick, 50 lb, lb easy open, mild steel, smooth arc, master carton, e7018 h4r requirement, 0.035 max, 0.30 max, typical result, clear puddle, low hydrogen. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Lincoln Excalibur 7018 XMR include: stick, 50 lb, lb easy open, 60 less moisture pickup, improved coating integrity, mn ni cr mo, typical result as welded, ft lbs, 350 mm, charpy v notch, extreme bendability, ft lbs 30 c. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639136944279,"sku":"ED037426","price":188.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639163846807,"sku":"ED037423","price":251.97,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43639137239191,"sku":"ED037427","price":188.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639163617431,"sku":"ED037424","price":251.97,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639136780439,"sku":"ED037425","price":188.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639163748503,"sku":"ED037422","price":13618.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed037426-excalibur-7018-xmr-stick-smaw-welding-rod-18x14-in-3-10-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760720031"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-8018-c1-mr-x-14-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln E8018-C1 (Excalibur 8018-C1 MR x 14 SMAW Welding Rod)","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-8018-c1-mr-x-14-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln E8018-C1 (Excalibur 8018-C1 MR x 14\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.5\/A5.5M E8018-C1 SMAW stick electrode family with 80 ksi minimum tensile and DC+ or AC, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 6 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln E8018-C1 (Excalibur 8018-C1 MR x 14\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE8018-C1 is an AWS A5.5 low-alloy low-hydrogen SMAW electrode with 80 ksi minimum tensile and a 2.5% nickel addition for improved low-temperature impact toughness. It is specified for low-temperature service vessels, LNG piping, and arctic structural fabrication where Charpy V-notch impact properties at -75 F or below are required. Runs DC+ or AC in all positions with the same low-hydrogen storage and rebake discipline as E7018.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E8018-C1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ or AC, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln E8018-C1 (Excalibur 8018-C1 MR x 14 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"1\/8 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638087483543,"sku":"ED030877","price":421.92,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639137337495,"sku":"ED032597","price":268.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43639137108119,"sku":"ED032596","price":295.72,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638088564887,"sku":"ED030878","price":408.85,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638052946071,"sku":"ED030879","price":417.45,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/4 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638054158487,"sku":"ED030880","price":422.67,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed030878-excalibur-8018-c1-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod-532x14-in-50-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594807"},{"product_id":"lincoln-ironarc-7018-mr-x-14-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln E7018 H4R (IronArc 7018 MR x 14 SMAW Welding Rod)","description":"\u003cp\u003eLincoln IronArc 7018 MR is a moisture-resistant E7018 H4R welding rod designed for structural, pressure vessel, and general fabrication welding where low hydrogen content (≤ 4 mL\/100g) and extended exposure tolerance are needed. With a 72,000 psi minimum tensile, DCEP or AC operation, and Lincoln's MR (moisture-resistant) flux coating, IronArc 7018 MR bridges the gap between standard E7018 and premium Excalibur 7018 MR — delivering proven H4R performance with an economical package suited to high-volume structural welding shops and contractors working in field conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is the Lincoln IronArc 7018 MR E7018 H4R Welding Rod?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIronArc 7018 MR is Lincoln Electric's value-positioned E7018 moisture-resistant SMAW electrode. The AWS classification E7018 H4R decodes as: \"E\" = electrode; \"70\" = 72,000 psi minimum tensile; \"1\" = all-position; \"8\" = low-hydrogen iron-powder covering, AC or DCEP; \"H4R\" = diffusible hydrogen ≤ 4 mL\/100g weld metal, with moisture-resistant coating. The H4R designation is critical for structural welding under AWS D1.1, ASME Section IX, and various bridge codes that mandate low-hydrogen filler for thick-section, high-restraint, and hydrogen-cracking-sensitive applications. IronArc 7018 MR occupies a specific market position: it provides the same essential H4R credentials as Lincoln's premium Excalibur 7018 MR but at a more accessible price point, making it a popular choice for fabrication shops and structural contractors who weld high volumes of E7018 under AWS D1.1 and need reliable hydrogen control without the premium Excalibur pricing on every pound of electrode consumed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \"MR\" moisture-resistant coating means the flux binder resists humidity absorption at a higher rate than standard E7018, extending the permitted out-of-oven exposure time. This is particularly valuable in field welding, bridge erection, and coastal or tropical construction environments where maintaining oven access between every rod change is impractical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Mechanical Specs — E7018 H4R Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Classification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eE7018\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH-Designation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH4R (≤ 4 mL\/100g diffusible H2, moisture-resistant)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e72,000 psi (496 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYield Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60,000 psi (414 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCharpy CVN (−20°F)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 ft·lbf minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow-hydrogen iron-powder, moisture-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC, DCEP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePositions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll (F, H, V-up, OH)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32, 1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 20 ft·lbf Charpy CVN at −20 °F is a critical distinction between E7018 and non-low-hydrogen electrodes (E7014, E6013). This CVN classification makes E7018 H4R the required filler metal for bridges, offshore structures, seismic zones, and other applications governed by AASHTO, AWS D1.5, or lateral load design requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for IronArc 7018 MR E7018 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAWS D1.1 structural steel fabrication\u003c\/strong\u003e — buildings, industrial structures, stadiums, and industrial equipment requiring low-hydrogen filler and CVN toughness.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBridge girder and component fabrication\u003c\/strong\u003e — AWS D1.5 bridge welding code applications requiring verified H4R low-hydrogen filler.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePressure vessel fabrication per ASME Section VIII\u003c\/strong\u003e — standard carbon-steel vessels where E7018 is the code-specified filler class.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eField welding on construction sites\u003c\/strong\u003e — the MR coating provides extended viability outside the oven for field welders who cannot maintain continuous oven access.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh-restraint joints on thick plate\u003c\/strong\u003e — the H4R designation is mandatory for joints with high stiffness, high preheat, and thick cross-section where hydrogen-induced cracking risk is elevated.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSeismic-zone construction\u003c\/strong\u003e — IBC and AISC seismic provisions require low-hydrogen, notch-tough weld metal in seismic force-resisting system connections.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use IronArc 7018 MR — Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDiameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePosition Notes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e65–100 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoot passes, sheet, tack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90–140 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGeneral structural fabrication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFill passes, large fillets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160–225 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy fill\/cap, flat\/horizontal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity:\u003c\/strong\u003e DCEP preferred; AC acceptable on most machines with minimum 70 V OCV. DCEP provides better arc stability and slightly better penetration than AC.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eArc length:\u003c\/strong\u003e Very short — 1\/2× to 1× electrode core diameter. E7018 is particularly sensitive to long arc length: a long arc introduces nitrogen, causes porosity, and spatter. The characteristic short arc and \"drag\" technique of E7018 is fundamental to its low-hydrogen performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInterpass temperature:\u003c\/strong\u003e Maintain preheat (typically 150–300 °F for A36–A572 Grade 50 per AWS D1.1) and do not allow interpass to exceed 450–500 °F for most structural applications. Verify per the applicable code and WPS.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling for E7018 H4R MR Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed containers:\u003c\/strong\u003e Lincoln's hermetically sealed canisters maintain H4R condition indefinitely at room temperature in a dry area.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHolding oven (mandatory once opened):\u003c\/strong\u003e 250–300 °F. MR coating extends the permitted out-of-oven exposure time per AWS D1.1 Table 4.7. Consult Lincoln's MR electrode guide for specific exposure time tables.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRedrying:\u003c\/strong\u003e 700–800 °F for 1 hour if moisture exposure is suspected. Track cumulative exposure time carefully.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNever use non-oven-stored E7018 on H4R-required welds:\u003c\/strong\u003e Moisture-absorbed E7018 can exceed 16 mL\/100g diffusible hydrogen — the primary cause of delayed hydrogen cracking in structural welds.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types for E7018\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A36, A572 Grades 42–65 structural steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A709 Grades 36, 50, 50W bridge plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A514, A517 quenched-and-tempered plate (verify preheat per code)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A516 Grades 55–70 pressure vessel plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAPI 2W Grade 50 offshore platform plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll groove and fillet joint types in all positions. IronArc 7018 MR is one of the most versatile structural electrodes available — the combination of H4R, all-position capability, CVN toughness, and MR coating covers virtually every structural welding requirement except the highest-specification Demand Critical welds (use Excalibur 7018 MR for those).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Lincoln IronArc 7018 MR E7018 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the difference between IronArc 7018 MR and Excalibur 7018 MR?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nBoth are E7018 H4R moisture-resistant electrodes. Excalibur 7018 MR is Lincoln's premium tier with tighter chemistry control, enhanced arc characteristics, and tested performance for Demand Critical weld applications per AWS D1.8 seismic provisions. IronArc 7018 MR is the value tier — same H4R and MR credentials at a more economical price, well-suited for high-volume standard structural fabrication where Demand Critical specification is not required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is diffusible hydrogen and why does H4R matter?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nDiffusible hydrogen (measured in mL\/100g of weld metal) is hydrogen that can migrate through the weld metal and HAZ after welding, concentrating at stress risers and creating hydrogen-assisted cold cracking (HACC). H4R limits diffusible hydrogen to ≤ 4 mL\/100g — the lowest standard classification under AWS. HACC can occur hours or days after welding on thick or restrained joints in high-strength steels, making H4R specification mandatory for many structural, bridge, and pressure vessel applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How long can I leave IronArc 7018 MR out of the oven on a job site?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe MR designation extends the permitted atmospheric exposure time relative to standard E7018. AWS D1.1 Table 4.7 defines maximum exposure times for low-hydrogen electrodes at various relative humidity levels. For H4R MR electrodes, exposure limits are typically 9 hours in environments up to 50 % RH. Consult Lincoln's published MR electrode exposure data for site-specific guidance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can I run IronArc 7018 MR on an AC buzz-box?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes, but only on AC machines with at least 70 V open-circuit voltage. At lower OCV, E7018 arc starts become inconsistent. Most modern AC transformers (Lincoln AC-225, Tombstone-style 225 A machines) meet this requirement. If your machine produces arc instability or frequent sticking with E7018, check OCV first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is E7018 required for all structural welding?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nNot always. For applications on mild steel (A36) with low restraint and no notch-toughness code requirement, E6013 or E7014 may be acceptable. E7018 is required when: (1) the weld code specifies Low Hydrogen (AWS D1.1 Table 4.5 Category F); (2) the joint is highly restrained, thick, or on high-yield steel (A572-65, A514); (3) the application requires CVN notch toughness. Verify with the applicable code and project specification before substituting filler metal classes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What OCV (open circuit voltage) is needed to run E7018?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n70 V minimum OCV is the general industry standard for reliable E7018 arc starts. At lower OCV (e.g., 50–60 V), arc starts are erratic and the electrode tends to stick on contact. Engine-driven welders and modern inverters typically exceed 70 V OCV; verify your machine's OCV before running E7018 on an unfamiliar power source.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can IronArc 7018 MR be used for root passes on pipe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nE7018 can be used for pipe root passes with a tight-fit, back-gouged, or ceramic-backed root configuration. For open-root pipe groove welds (no backing), the fast-freeze is less reliable than E6010\/E6011. Most pipe welding procedures use E6010 for the root and hot pass, then fill and cap with E7018. Consult the applicable WPS for root pass electrode specification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the difference between IronArc 7018 MR and Excalibur 7018 MR?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Both are E7018 H4R MR electrodes. Excalibur is the premium tier with tighter chemistry for Demand Critical applications. IronArc is the value tier with the same H4R and MR credentials for standard high-volume structural fabrication.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is diffusible hydrogen and why does H4R matter?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Diffusible hydrogen migrates through weld metal and HAZ, causing hydrogen-assisted cold cracking hours or days after welding. H4R limits it to 4 mL\/100g — the lowest AWS classification, mandatory for thick, restrained, or high-strength steel applications.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How long can I leave IronArc 7018 MR out of the oven?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"AWS D1.1 Table 4.7 permits up to 9 hours exposure for H4R MR electrodes in environments up to 50% RH. Consult Lincoln's MR electrode exposure tables for site-specific guidance.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I run IronArc 7018 MR on an AC buzz-box?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes, on AC machines with at least 70V OCV. Below this, arc starts become inconsistent. Most modern 225A transformers meet this requirement.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What OCV is needed for E7018?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"70V minimum OCV for reliable arc starts. Below 60V, E7018 tends to stick. Verify your machine's OCV before use.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is E7018 required for all structural welding?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Only when code specifies Low Hydrogen (AWS D1.1 Table 4.5 Category F), or when the joint is thick\/restrained\/high-yield, or when CVN toughness is required. For simple mild steel low-restraint work, E7014 or E6013 may be acceptable — verify with the applicable code.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can IronArc 7018 MR be used for pipe root passes?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"E7018 can be used for root passes on ceramic-backed or back-gouged pipe configurations. For open-root pipe, most WPS call for E6010 root and hot pass, then E7018 fill and cap.\"}}\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eE7018 H4R Low-Hydrogen Welding Rod Technical Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E7018 H4R classification represents the most stringent hydrogen control available for standard-strength structural carbon steel welding. Diffusible hydrogen testing per AWS A4.3 measures the total hydrogen released from a weld metal sample immersed in mercury at 45°C for 72 hours — H4 means this total does not exceed 4 mL per 100g of weld metal deposited. For comparison, standard E7018 (non-H designated) can exceed 8 mL\/100g, and a moisture-absorbed E7018 can reach 16 mL\/100g or higher. Hydrogen-induced cold cracking (HICC), also called underbead cracking or delayed cracking, occurs when three conditions coincide: susceptible microstructure (hardened HAZ martensite), sufficient hydrogen, and applied or residual tensile stress. Removing any one of these three factors prevents HICC — preheat reduces the HAZ hardness by slowing cooling, H4R limits hydrogen, and proper joint design minimizes residual stress concentration. For structural engineers and welding engineers specifying filler metal for thick, high-restraint, or higher-strength-steel joints, H4R designation provides the hydrogen control margin needed to prevent HICC even when preheat or interpass control is less than perfect. Lincoln IronArc 7018 MR combines H4R with moisture-resistant (MR) flux to extend the practical field exposure window, making it the most field-practical way to maintain H4R compliance on construction sites and in maintenance environments.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"5\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":44222936514711,"sku":"ED040002","price":233.08,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":44222936547479,"sku":"ED040003","price":145.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":44222935957655,"sku":"ED040000-1","price":154.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":44222935990423,"sku":"ED040000","price":241.63,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":44222936481943,"sku":"ED040001-1","price":151.56,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":44222936023191,"sku":"ED040001","price":233.08,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed040002-ironarc-7018-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod-532x14-in-50-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1746614844"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-9018m-mr-x-14-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln E9018M (Excalibur 9018M MR x 14 SMAW Welding Rod)","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-9018m-mr-x-14-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln E9018M (Excalibur 9018M MR x 14\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.5\/A5.5M E9018-M SMAW stick electrode family with 90 ksi minimum tensile and DC+ or AC, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 6 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln E9018M (Excalibur 9018M MR x 14\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE9018-M is an AWS A5.5 low-alloy low-hydrogen SMAW electrode with 90 ksi minimum tensile and military-spec (MIL) chemistry tightly controlled for low temperature impact toughness on HY-80 \/ HY-100 high-strength steels in shipbuilding, submarine, and naval structural fabrication. Runs DC+ or AC in all positions; strict moisture control and rebake protocols apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E9018-M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ or AC, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln E9018M (Excalibur 9018M MR x 14 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"5\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638084206743,"sku":"ED030870","price":339.75,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638085648535,"sku":"ED030871","price":362.24,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638117531799,"sku":"ED032602","price":248.34,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638083027095,"sku":"ED030868","price":384.67,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638118383767,"sku":"ED032603","price":242.52,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638083944599,"sku":"ED030869","price":367.58,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed030870-excalibur-9018m-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod-532x14-in-50-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594807"},{"product_id":"lincoln-blue-max-2100-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Blue Max 2100 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- Stick Lane A | handle: lincoln-blue-max-2100-stick-smaw-welding-rod | 2026-06-16 --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eLincoln Blue Max 2100 E308L-16 Stainless Steel Electrode — Overview\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Blue Max 2100\u003c\/strong\u003e is an \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E308L-16\u003c\/strong\u003e stainless steel SMAW electrode delivering an austenitic 308L deposit for joining and overlaying 304 and 304L stainless steel — the most widely specified austenitic stainless steel in food processing, pharmaceutical, chemical, and dairy equipment. The \"L\" designation limits carbon content to ≤ 0.04% to minimize sensitization and intergranular corrosion in the heat-affected zone, making Blue Max 2100 the right choice where weld joints will be exposed to corrosive media without post-weld solution annealing. The \"-16\" rutile-lime coating runs on \u003cstrong\u003eAC or DC+\u003c\/strong\u003e, providing flexibility for use on AC machines in field installations. WeldingMart stocks Lincoln Blue Max 2100 as an authorized Lincoln Electric distributor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-specs\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E308L-16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDeposit alloy\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAustenitic 308L stainless (~20% Cr, 10% Ni, ≤ 0.04% C)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCoating type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRutile-lime (-16 coating)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ (DCEP) or AC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions: 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G (flat, horizontal, vertical, overhead)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80,000 psi (552 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFerrite number (FN)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5–15 FN (per AWS A5.4 requirements)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in: 40–80 A | 1\/8 in: 65–110 A | 5\/32 in: 90–140 A | 3\/16 in: 115–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32, 1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase metals welded\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e304, 304L, 308, 308L stainless steel; also overlaying carbon steel with stainless\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLincoln Electric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M; ASME Section IX P-No. 8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-applications\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eApplications \u0026amp; Industries\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eBlue Max 2100 (E308L-16) is the standard stainless SMAW electrode for food-grade, pharmaceutical, and chemical service:\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFood processing equipment:\u003c\/strong\u003e Tanks, vessels, conveyors, and piping fabricated from 304\/304L stainless steel where corrosion resistance and cleanability are required — dairy lines, breweries, slaughterhouses, and beverage processing\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePharmaceutical and biotech:\u003c\/strong\u003e Sanitary process piping and vessels in 304L stainless where USDA\/FDA cleanability standards apply\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChemical process equipment:\u003c\/strong\u003e Tanks and piping handling dilute acids, chlorides, and organic compounds where 304\/308L corrosion resistance is sufficient\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCryogenic applications:\u003c\/strong\u003e 308L austenitic stainless maintains ductility at cryogenic temperatures; used for LNG, liquid nitrogen, and cryogenic vessel fabrication\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance and repair:\u003c\/strong\u003e Field repair of existing 304 stainless equipment in chemical plants, canneries, and industrial kitchens\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technique\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eProcess Technology — How to Weld Stainless Steel with E308L-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeat input control:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use the minimum amperage that produces a sound, fully fused bead. Excessive heat input on stainless steel widens the HAZ, increases distortion, and promotes sensitization even in 308L. Keep heat input below 35 kJ\/in where possible.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInterpass temperature:\u003c\/strong\u003e Limit interpass temperature to 350°F (177°C) maximum for austenitic stainless steel. Allow the joint to cool between passes — this is the most common error on stainless fabrication and the primary cause of distortion and sensitization.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStringer beads:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use stringer beads rather than weaving. Stringers minimize width of the heat-affected zone and reduce distortion in austenitic stainless.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBacking gas (purge):\u003c\/strong\u003e For pipe joints and full-penetration welds, purge the root side of the joint with argon to prevent oxidation of the root bead. Without purging, the root bead will show \"sugaring\" (oxidation) that reduces corrosion resistance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSurface preparation:\u003c\/strong\u003e Clean the weld zone with stainless-steel-dedicated wire brushes and solvents. Do not use carbon steel wire brushes or grinding wheels that have been used on carbon steel — contamination will cause rust in the stainless weld.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePost-weld cleaning:\u003c\/strong\u003e Passivate the weld zone with citric acid or nitric acid solution to restore the chromium oxide passive film. Remove all weld spatter with stainless chisels (not carbon steel).\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-storage\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eStore in original sealed packaging in a dry location at ambient temperature\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eStainless steel electrodes (AWS A5.4) are not classified as low-hydrogen in the same manner as carbon steel electrodes, but should be kept dry\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eIf electrodes have been exposed to moisture, re-dry at 300–400°F (149–204°C) for 30–60 minutes before use\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUse stainless-dedicated storage containers — do not mix with carbon steel electrodes\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eProtect from contamination with carbon steel particles, dirt, and grease\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-faq\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cdl\u003e\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is E308L used for?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eE308L-16 (Lincoln Blue Max 2100) is used to weld 304 and 304L austenitic stainless steel — the most common stainless steel in food processing, pharmaceutical, chemical, and cryogenic applications. The \"L\" low-carbon grade minimizes sensitization (carbide precipitation at grain boundaries) and is the preferred choice when weld joints will be exposed to corrosive environments without post-weld heat treatment.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is the difference between 308L and 309L stainless electrodes?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eE308L is used for welding 304\/304L stainless to itself. E309L is used for welding stainless steel to carbon steel (dissimilar metal joints) or as a butter layer before overlaying carbon steel with stainless. The higher chromium and nickel in 309L provides a chemical \"bridge\" that handles the dilution from carbon steel without losing austenitic corrosion resistance. Use 308L for SS-to-SS; use 309L for SS-to-carbon steel.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eDo I need to purge the back of the weld when using E308L?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eFor pipe joints and full-penetration welds where the root side will be exposed to corrosive service, an argon purge on the back of the root is strongly recommended. Without purge, the root bead oxidizes (\"sugars\") during welding, creating a porous, rough surface that traps contaminants and corrodes preferentially. In shop practice on plate or non-critical welds, purging may be omitted — but for food, pharmaceutical, and chemical service piping, back purging is standard.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eCan I use E308L on 316 stainless steel?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eFor most non-critical applications, E308L can be used on 316\/316L stainless with acceptable results, since the 308L deposit has higher toughness and the 2–3% Cr and Ni difference rarely matters in low-chloride environments. For high-chloride or aggressive chemical service where 316's molybdenum content is essential, use an AWS A5.4 E316L electrode to match the molybdenum-bearing deposit. Confirm with your design specification.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n  \u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-crosslinks\"\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse all stainless electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — or compare with a \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-excalibur-7018-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018\u003c\/a\u003e for carbon steel fill passes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is E308L used for?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"E308L-16 is used to weld 304 and 304L austenitic stainless steel in food processing, pharmaceutical, chemical, and cryogenic applications. The low-carbon 'L' grade minimizes sensitization when weld joints will be exposed to corrosive environments without post-weld heat treatment.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the difference between 308L and 309L stainless electrodes?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"E308L welds 304\/304L stainless to itself. E309L welds stainless to carbon steel (dissimilar metal joints) or as a butter layer. Use 308L for SS-to-SS; use 309L for SS-to-carbon steel.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Do I need to purge the back of the weld when using E308L?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"For pipe joints and full-penetration welds in food, pharmaceutical, or chemical service, argon back purging is strongly recommended to prevent root bead oxidation (sugaring). For non-critical plate welds, purging may be omitted.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I use E308L on 316 stainless steel?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"For most non-critical applications, E308L can be used on 316\/316L with acceptable results. For high-chloride or aggressive chemical service where molybdenum is essential, use E316L to match the deposit chemistry.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638093512855,"sku":"ED032298","price":295.35,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638094790807,"sku":"ED032299","price":290.39,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed032298-blue-max-2100-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-14-in-3-10-lb-easy-open-cans-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594746"},{"product_id":"lincoln-chromet-2x-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Chromet 2X Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-chromet-2x-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Chromet 2X\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.5\/A5.5M E9018-B3 SMAW stick electrode family with 90 ksi minimum tensile and DC+ or AC, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 3 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Chromet 2X\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE9018-B3 is an AWS A5.5 low-alloy low-hydrogen SMAW electrode with 90 ksi minimum tensile and a 2.25 Cr \/ 1.0 Mo alloy composition (P22) for high-temperature service to ~1100 F. It is the standard electrode for welding P22 steam piping in power-generation and refinery service. Runs DC+ or AC in all positions; PWHT is required for code work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E9018-B3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ or AC, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Chromet 2X from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"2.5mm · 4.1 kg","offer_id":43639133896855,"sku":"CHROMET2X-25","price":82.37,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"350mm · 12 kg","offer_id":44222905024663,"sku":"CHROMET2X-32-1","price":56.69,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"450mm · 16.8 kg","offer_id":44222905090199,"sku":"CHROMET2X-40-1","price":227.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-chromet-2x-2-5x350-can-chromet2x-25-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760720032"},{"product_id":"lincoln-chromet-9-stick-smaw-welding-rod-1","title":"Lincoln Chromet 9 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-chromet-9-stick-smaw-welding-rod-1 | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Chromet 9\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.5\/A5.5M E8015-B8 SMAW stick electrode family with 80 ksi minimum tensile and DC+ only, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 2 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Chromet 9\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE8015-B8 is an AWS A5.5 low-alloy low-hydrogen lime-basic-coated SMAW electrode with 80 ksi minimum tensile and a 9 Cr \/ 1 Mo alloy composition for elevated-temperature creep-resistant service. Standard for welding P9 grade pipe and tube in power generation, refinery, and petrochemical service. DC+ only in all positions; PWHT is required for code work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E8015-B8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ only, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Chromet 9 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"2.5mm · 11.7 kg (CHROMET9-25)","offer_id":43639132160151,"sku":"CHROMET9-25","price":104.52,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"2.5mm · 11.7 kg (CHROMET9-25-1)","offer_id":45224863957143,"sku":"CHROMET9-25-1","price":8294.83,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-chromet-9-2-5x350-can-chromet9-25-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760720032"},{"product_id":"lincoln-chromet-92-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Chromet 92 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- Stick Lane A | handle: lincoln-chromet-92-stick-smaw-welding-rod | 2026-06-16 --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eLincoln Chromet 92 E9015-B91 — Overview\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Chromet 92\u003c\/strong\u003e is a low-hydrogen, low-alloy SMAW electrode classified to \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E9015-B91\u003c\/strong\u003e, engineered for welding modified 9Cr-1Mo-V (Grade 91) creep-resistant steel used in the most demanding high-temperature power generation and petrochemical applications. Grade 91 (ASTM A335 P91, A182 F91, ASME P-No. 5B) has largely displaced older 9Cr-1Mo steels due to its significantly improved creep strength above 1000°F, and requires precisely matched filler metal to achieve the required mechanical properties in the as-welded-and-PWHT condition. Chromet 92 meets AWS A5.5 B91 alloy requirements with a controlled deposit chemistry including 8.0–10.5% Cr, 0.85–1.05% Mo, and critical vanadium, niobium, and nitrogen additions. \u003cstrong\u003eDC+ only.\u003c\/strong\u003e Available at WeldingMart as an authorized Lincoln Electric distributor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-specs\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E9015-B91\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAlloy chemistry (deposit)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8.0–10.5% Cr, 0.85–1.05% Mo, V, Nb, N additions (nominal)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCoating type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow-hydrogen, basic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ (DCEP) only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions: 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90,000 psi (620 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum yield strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e78,000 psi (538 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElongation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e14% minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in: 90–140 A | 5\/32 in: 115–170 A | 3\/16 in: 145–215 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLincoln Electric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M B91; ASME Section IX P-No. 5B; ASME B31.1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-applications\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eApplications \u0026amp; Industries\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUltra-supercritical (USC) power plants:\u003c\/strong\u003e Main steam and hot reheat piping, headers, and thick-section pressure parts in USC boilers operating above 1050°F service temperature\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFossil fuel power generation:\u003c\/strong\u003e Superheater and reheater tube stubs, header nozzles, and main steam system components fabricated from ASTM A335 P91 or A213 T91 tubing\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePetrochemical and refinery:\u003c\/strong\u003e High-temperature, high-pressure reactor piping and pressure vessels where Grade 91 provides superior creep resistance over P22\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRepair welding:\u003c\/strong\u003e In-service repair of Grade 91 power plant components using properly qualified WPS procedures with controlled preheat and PWHT\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHRSG (Heat Recovery Steam Generator):\u003c\/strong\u003e Duct burner and HRSG header fabrication for combined-cycle power plants\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technique\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eProcess Technology — How to Run E9015-B91 (Grade 91)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eGrade 91 welding requires strict adherence to qualified procedures. Key requirements:\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePreheat:\u003c\/strong\u003e 400–500°F (204–260°C) minimum preheat and interpass temperature. The preheat must be maintained throughout the entire weld cycle; loss of preheat risks hydrogen cracking and martensite formation without tempering.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInterpass temperature maximum:\u003c\/strong\u003e 600°F (315°C) to control microstructure. The martensite transformation temperature (Ms) for Grade 91 is approximately 750°F — controlling interpass temperature is essential for achieving a fully martensitic microstructure before PWHT.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCooling to MFRT:\u003c\/strong\u003e Before PWHT, the weldment must cool below the martensite-finish temperature (~200°F \/ 93°C) to ensure complete martensite transformation — a critical, often-overlooked step unique to Grade 91.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePost-Weld Heat Treatment:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1350–1400°F (732–760°C) for a minimum of 1 hour per inch of wall thickness. PWHT is mandatory — as-welded Grade 91 is not acceptable for service.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeat input control:\u003c\/strong\u003e Limit heat input per WPS. Excessive heat input degrades the creep properties of the HAZ (Type IV cracking zone).\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLow-hydrogen discipline:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use electrodes from sealed packaging or holding oven at 250–300°F. Maintain heated quiver during welding.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-storage\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eChromet 92 is a \u003cstrong\u003elow-hydrogen electrode\u003c\/strong\u003e. Hydrogen control is critical when welding Grade 91 alloy steel:\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eStore sealed in original packaging at ambient temperature, away from moisture\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eAfter opening: transfer to a holding oven at 250–300°F (121–149°C) immediately\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUse within 4 hours of removal from oven or recondition at 700–800°F (371–427°C) for 1 hour maximum once\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eField: use a heated quiver. Never leave Grade 91 filler metal in open air overnight\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eReconditioned electrodes must still meet AWS A5.5 diffusible hydrogen requirements — do not recondition rods that show visible coating damage\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-faq\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cdl\u003e\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is Grade 91 steel and why does it need a special electrode?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eGrade 91 (modified 9Cr-1Mo-V steel, ASTM A335 P91) is a creep-resistant alloy steel with additions of vanadium, niobium, and nitrogen that dramatically improve its high-temperature strength versus conventional 9Cr-1Mo. Its complex alloy chemistry requires precisely matched filler metal (E9015-B91 \/ E9018-B91) to achieve the required post-weld microstructure and creep properties after PWHT. Using mismatched filler metal is one of the leading causes of premature Grade 91 weld failures.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is the difference between Lincoln Chromet 9 and Chromet 92?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eLincoln Chromet 9 (E8015-B8) is designed for conventional 9Cr-1Mo steel (ASTM A335 P9) without the vanadium-niobium-nitrogen additions. Chromet 92 (E9015-B91) is specifically formulated for modified 9Cr-1Mo-V Grade 91 with the controlled V, Nb, N chemistry required to match Grade 91 base metal properties. Do not substitute Chromet 9 for Grade 91 applications.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhy do Grade 91 welds need to cool before PWHT?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eGrade 91 undergoes a martensitic transformation on cooling. The martensite-finish temperature (Mf) is approximately 200°F (93°C). The weldment must cool below this temperature before PWHT to ensure complete martensite transformation — otherwise, retained austenite can remain in the weld, and PWHT will not produce the correct tempered martensitic microstructure. This mandatory pre-PWHT cooling step is unique to Grade 91 compared to P22 and other Cr-Mo steels.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eIs PWHT mandatory for Chromet 92 welds?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eYes, in all code-governed applications. Grade 91 in the as-welded condition has high hardness and extremely low toughness. PWHT at 1350–1400°F tempers the martensitic microstructure to achieve the creep properties for which Grade 91 is specified. ASME B31.1 and B31.3 both mandate PWHT for P-No. 5B materials.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n  \u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-crosslinks\"\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse all Cr-Mo electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — or compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-chromet-9-b9-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eLincoln Chromet 9-B9 (E8015-B8)\u003c\/a\u003e for conventional 9Cr-1Mo applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is Grade 91 steel and why does it need a special electrode?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Grade 91 (modified 9Cr-1Mo-V steel, ASTM A335 P91) requires precisely matched filler metal (E9015-B91) with controlled vanadium, niobium, and nitrogen additions to achieve the required post-weld microstructure and creep properties after PWHT.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the difference between Lincoln Chromet 9 and Chromet 92?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Chromet 9 (E8015-B8) is for conventional 9Cr-1Mo steel (P9) without V-Nb-N additions. Chromet 92 (E9015-B91) is specifically for modified 9Cr-1Mo-V Grade 91. Do not substitute Chromet 9 for Grade 91 applications.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Why do Grade 91 welds need to cool before PWHT?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"The weldment must cool below the martensite-finish temperature (~200°F) before PWHT to ensure complete martensite transformation. Without this pre-PWHT cooling step, retained austenite will remain and PWHT will not produce the correct tempered martensitic microstructure.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is PWHT mandatory for Chromet 92 welds?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes. Grade 91 in the as-welded condition has high hardness and low toughness. PWHT at 1350–1400°F is mandatory under ASME B31.1, B31.3, and Section VIII to temper the microstructure and achieve design creep properties.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 3.7 kg","offer_id":45224864448663,"sku":"CH92-25-1","price":11265.42,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 11.7 kg","offer_id":45224864514199,"sku":"CH92-32-2","price":266.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"350mm","offer_id":44222904041623,"sku":"CH92-32-1","price":270.52,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/Lincoln-CH92-25-1-CHROMET-92-Stick-SMAW-Steel-Welding-Rod-8-2lb-Can.jpg?v=1753385723"},{"product_id":"lincoln-chromet-9-b9-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Chromet 9-B9 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- Stick Lane A | handle: lincoln-chromet-9-b9-stick-smaw-welding-rod | 2026-06-16 --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eLincoln Chromet 9-B9 E8015-B8 — Overview\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Chromet 9-B9\u003c\/strong\u003e is a low-hydrogen, low-alloy SMAW electrode classified to \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E8015-B8\u003c\/strong\u003e, designed for welding conventional 9Cr-1Mo alloy steel (ASTM A335 Grade P9, ASME P-No. 5B) used in high-temperature petroleum refining, power generation boilers, and heat exchangers operating at elevated service temperatures. The B8 deposit chemistry provides approximately 8.0–10.5% Cr and 0.85–1.05% Mo in the weld metal to match the oxidation and creep resistance of the P9 base material. Unlike the newer modified Grade 91 (B91), conventional 9Cr-1Mo (P9) does not contain the vanadium-niobium-nitrogen additions, resulting in lower creep strength but simpler PWHT requirements. \u003cstrong\u003eDC+ (DCEP) only; all positions.\u003c\/strong\u003e Available at WeldingMart as an authorized Lincoln Electric distributor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-specs\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E8015-B8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAlloy chemistry (deposit)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8.0–10.5% Cr, 0.85–1.05% Mo (nominal)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCoating type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow-hydrogen, basic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ (DCEP) only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions: 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80,000 psi (551 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum yield strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e68,000 psi (469 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElongation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16% minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in: 85–135 A | 5\/32 in: 110–165 A | 3\/16 in: 140–210 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLincoln Electric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M; ASME Section IX P-No. 5B; ASME B31.3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-applications\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eApplications \u0026amp; Industries\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePetroleum refinery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Catalytic cracker, fractionation, and coker unit piping fabricated from ASTM A335 Grade P9 alloy steel where conventional 9Cr-1Mo composition is specified\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePower generation boilers:\u003c\/strong\u003e Boiler superheater and reheater tube systems operating at elevated service temperatures where P9 alloy is the specified material\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeat exchangers and pressure vessels:\u003c\/strong\u003e Shell-and-tube heat exchangers in corrosive, high-temperature service where chromium content provides oxidation resistance\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDissimilar metal joints:\u003c\/strong\u003e Welding 9Cr-1Mo steel to 2¼Cr-1Mo (P22) or carbon steel components using appropriate butter layers and documented WPS procedures\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRepair welding:\u003c\/strong\u003e In-service maintenance and repair of existing P9 components in operating refineries and power plants\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technique\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eProcess Technology — How to Run E8015-B8\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePreheat:\u003c\/strong\u003e 300–400°F (149–204°C) minimum preheat for P9 alloy steel. Follow ASME B31.3 Table 330.1.1 or applicable code for the specific base metal heat and section thickness.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInterpass temperature:\u003c\/strong\u003e Maintain above preheat minimum; do not exceed 600°F (315°C) maximum interpass to control microstructure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePost-Weld Heat Treatment:\u003c\/strong\u003e Required per ASME B31.3 for P-No. 5B materials — typical PWHT range 1300–1400°F (704–760°C) for 1 hour minimum per inch of thickness.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLow-hydrogen technique:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use electrodes directly from holding oven at 250–300°F or from sealed packaging. Maintain heated quiver in the field; use within 4 hours of removal.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBead technique:\u003c\/strong\u003e Stringer or narrow weave beads; limit heat input per WPS. Wire brush and inspect each bead before depositing the next pass.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eArc restart:\u003c\/strong\u003e Re-strike in front of the previous bead crater; back-step to fill the crater before proceeding. Chip and brush slag between every pass.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-storage\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling — Low-Hydrogen Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBefore opening:\u003c\/strong\u003e Store sealed packaging in a dry ambient-temperature location (40–120°F \/ 4–49°C)\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAfter opening:\u003c\/strong\u003e Transfer immediately to a holding oven at 250–300°F (121–149°C). Use within 4 hours of removal or recondition at 700–800°F (371–427°C) for 1 hour per AWS A5.5\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eField storage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use a heated electrode quiver. Do not leave exposed to ambient air overnight\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReconditioning:\u003c\/strong\u003e Permissible once per AWS A5.5. Do not recondition electrodes showing visible coating damage or cracking\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-faq\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cdl\u003e\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is the difference between E8015-B8 (Chromet 9-B9) and E9015-B91 (Chromet 92)?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eE8015-B8 (Chromet 9-B9) is designed for conventional 9Cr-1Mo alloy steel (ASTM A335 P9, ASME P-No. 5B) without vanadium-niobium-nitrogen additions. E9015-B91 (Chromet 92) is for modified 9Cr-1Mo-V Grade 91 (P91), which includes controlled additions of V, Nb, and N for significantly higher creep strength. Do not use Chromet 9-B9 (B8) on Grade 91 applications — the alloy chemistry will not match the required deposit composition.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is E8015 vs E8018 coating type?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eBoth E8015 and E8018 are low-hydrogen classifications. The \"15\" suffix indicates a low-hydrogen coating running DC+ only; the \"18\" suffix indicates a low-hydrogen iron-powder coating that can run on DC+ or AC. For most alloy steel applications in ASME code work, both are acceptable per the WPS. Chromet 9-B9 is the \"15\" (DC+ only) variant.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat PWHT is required for E8015-B8 welds?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eASME B31.3 and Section VIII require post-weld heat treatment for P-No. 5B (9Cr-1Mo) materials. Typical PWHT: 1300–1400°F (704–760°C) for 1 hour minimum per inch of weld thickness. Confirm specific requirements in your qualified WPS — PWHT temperature and time vary with base metal composition and section thickness.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eDoes Lincoln Chromet 9-B9 require a holding oven?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eYes. E8015-B8 is a low-hydrogen electrode — after the sealed packaging is opened, transfer electrodes immediately to a holding oven at 250–300°F (121–149°C). Use within 4 hours of oven removal or return for reconditioning. Hydrogen-induced cracking (HICC) is the primary risk when low-hydrogen electrodes are used without proper moisture control on alloy steels.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n  \u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-crosslinks\"\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse Cr-Mo electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — or compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-chromet-92-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eLincoln Chromet 92 E9015-B91\u003c\/a\u003e for modified Grade 91 applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the difference between E8015-B8 and E9015-B91?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"E8015-B8 (Chromet 9-B9) is for conventional 9Cr-1Mo steel (ASTM A335 P9) without V-Nb-N additions. E9015-B91 (Chromet 92) is for modified 9Cr-1Mo-V Grade 91 with controlled additions for higher creep strength. Do not use B8 filler metal on Grade 91 applications.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What PWHT is required for E8015-B8 welds?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"ASME B31.3 and Section VIII require PWHT for P-No. 5B (9Cr-1Mo) materials. Typical PWHT: 1300–1400°F for 1 hour minimum per inch of weld thickness. Follow your qualified WPS for specific requirements.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Lincoln Chromet 9-B9 require a holding oven?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes. After opening the sealed packaging, transfer immediately to a holding oven at 250–300°F. Use within 4 hours of oven removal or recondition at 700–800°F for 1 hour per AWS A5.5.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"5.0mm · 5.5 kg","offer_id":43639153721495,"sku":"CH9B9-50","price":87.73,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 lb","offer_id":45224864350359,"sku":"CH9B9-50-1","price":14336.64,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"350mm · 12.3 kg","offer_id":44222904139927,"sku":"CH9B9-32-1","price":101.84,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"350mm · 12.9 kg","offer_id":44222904107159,"sku":"CH9B9-25-1","price":334.68,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"450mm · 16.2 kg","offer_id":44222904172695,"sku":"CH9B9-40-1","price":125.84,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-chromet-9-b9-5-0x450-can-ch9b9-50-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760719649"},{"product_id":"lincoln-chromet-1x-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Chromet 1X Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-chromet-1x-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Chromet 1X\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.5\/A5.5M E8018-B2 SMAW stick electrode family with 80 ksi minimum tensile and DC+ or AC, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 3 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Chromet 1X\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE8018-B2 is an AWS A5.5 low-alloy low-hydrogen SMAW electrode with 80 ksi minimum tensile and a 1.25 Cr \/ 0.5 Mo alloy composition for elevated-temperature service. It is the standard for welding 1.25 Cr-0.5 Mo (P11) piping and pressure vessels in power generation, refinery, and petrochemical service. Runs DC+ or AC in all positions; PWHT (post-weld heat treatment) is typically required for code work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E8018-B2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ or AC, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Chromet 1X from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"450mm · 5.6 kg","offer_id":43639154606231,"sku":"CHROMET1X-40","price":108.17,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"12 lb","offer_id":45224864120983,"sku":"CHROMET1X-50-1","price":8682.24,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"450mm · 16.5 kg","offer_id":44222904631447,"sku":"CHROMET1X-40-1","price":234.83,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-chromet-1x-4-0x450-can-chromet1x-40-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760719648"},{"product_id":"lincoln-cromo-e225-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Cromo E225 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-cromo-e225-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Cromo E225\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.5\/A5.5M E9015-B3 SMAW stick electrode family with 90 ksi minimum tensile and DC+ only, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 3 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Cromo E225\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE9015-B3 is an AWS A5.5 low-alloy low-hydrogen lime-basic-coated SMAW electrode with 90 ksi minimum tensile and a 2.25 Cr \/ 1 Mo alloy composition for elevated-temperature creep-resistant service. Standard for welding P22 (2.25 Cr-1 Mo) piping and pressure vessels in power generation, refinery, and petrochemical service to ASME Section I and Section VIII. DC+ in all positions; PWHT required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E9015-B3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ only, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Cromo E225 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"5\/32 in · 5 kg","offer_id":44222941036695,"sku":"W100287667","price":380.36,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 4 kg","offer_id":44222941102231,"sku":"W100287668","price":367.67,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"350mm · 12 kg","offer_id":44222940840087,"sku":"W100287666","price":280.66,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-w100287667-cromo-e225-welding-rod-smaw-532-18in-5-5kg-box-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1753402523"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-10018-d2-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 10018-D2 MR E10018-D2 Stick Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- Stick Lane A | handle: lincoln-excalibur-10018-d2-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod | 2026-06-16 --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eLincoln Excalibur 10018-D2 MR E10018-D2 — Overview\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 10018-D2 MR\u003c\/strong\u003e is a low-alloy, low-hydrogen SMAW electrode classified to \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E10018-D2\u003c\/strong\u003e, designed for welding high-strength structural steel, quenched-and-tempered (Q\u0026amp;T) steel, and heavy construction applications where 100 ksi minimum tensile strength is required. The D2 designation specifies a manganese-molybdenum alloy deposit (1.65–2.0% Mn, 0.25–0.45% Mo) that achieves exceptional strength and CVN toughness in the as-deposited and post-weld heat-treated condition. The \u003cstrong\u003eMR (Moisture Resistant)\u003c\/strong\u003e hermetically sealed packaging maintains the H4 diffusible hydrogen designation until the can is opened — critical for preventing hydrogen-induced cracking in high-strength steels. \u003cstrong\u003eDC+ (DCEP) only; all positions.\u003c\/strong\u003e Available at WeldingMart as an authorized Lincoln Electric distributor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-specs\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E10018-D2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAlloy chemistry (deposit)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.65–2.0% Mn, 0.25–0.45% Mo (D2 composition)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCoating type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow-hydrogen, iron-powder basic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ (DCEP) only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions: 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100,000 psi (690 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum yield strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e88,000 psi (607 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElongation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16% minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCVN impact (-20°F)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 ft-lb (54 J) per AWS A5.5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDiffusible hydrogen\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH4 — ≤ 4 mL\/100g (MR packaging)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMoisture Resistant (MR)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes — hermetically sealed packaging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in: 100–150 A | 5\/32 in: 130–190 A | 3\/16 in: 160–230 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLincoln Electric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M; AWS D1.1; ASME Section IX\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-applications\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eApplications \u0026amp; Industries\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eExcalibur 10018-D2 MR is specified for high-strength steel welding in critical structural and construction applications:\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuenched-and-tempered structural steel:\u003c\/strong\u003e Welding ASTM A514, A517, A709 Grade 100\/100W, and equivalent Q\u0026amp;T steels requiring 100 ksi minimum tensile filler metal matching\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeavy construction equipment:\u003c\/strong\u003e Crane booms, earthmoving equipment frames, mining equipment structures, and OEM fabrication on high-strength structural components\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBridge fabrication:\u003c\/strong\u003e AWS D1.5 bridge code applications on higher-strength steel members where 100 ksi electrodes are required by the project specification\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMilitary and armor fabrication:\u003c\/strong\u003e Tactical vehicle structures and ballistic steel applications requiring high-strength Mn-Mo filler metal\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOffshore structures:\u003c\/strong\u003e High-strength steel nodes, jackets, and deck structures where elevated strength requirements combined with toughness certification are mandatory\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePressure vessels and vessels under external pressure:\u003c\/strong\u003e ASME Section VIII applications on higher-strength alloy steels in the D2 composition range\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technique\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eProcess Technology — How to Run E10018-D2\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePreheat:\u003c\/strong\u003e Mandatory. For A514\/A517 Q\u0026amp;T steels, AWS D1.1 Table 3.2 requires preheat of 125–225°F depending on thickness category. Higher-CE steels may require up to 400°F. Follow your WPS.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInterpass temperature maximum:\u003c\/strong\u003e 400°F (204°C) for Q\u0026amp;T steels. High interpass temperature degrades the tempered martensite microstructure of Q\u0026amp;T base metal — exceeding the interpass limit is the most common way to reduce the HAZ toughness on A514.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeat input control:\u003c\/strong\u003e Limit heat input per your WPS. For A514, AWS D1.1 specifies maximum heat input by plate thickness — typically 55–65 kJ\/in for thinner material, up to 90 kJ\/in for thicker sections. Excessive heat input over-tempers the HAZ and reduces strength.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLow-hydrogen discipline:\u003c\/strong\u003e H4 diffusible hydrogen is non-negotiable on 100 ksi Q\u0026amp;T steels. Use directly from the sealed MR can or holding oven at 250–300°F. Do not leave electrodes in open air.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStringer beads:\u003c\/strong\u003e Stringer beads with minimal weave — wide weaving increases heat input and widens the over-tempered HAZ zone.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSlag removal:\u003c\/strong\u003e Remove all slag between passes. Inspect each pass for cracks — restart immediately if visual inspection indicates cold cracking has occurred.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-storage\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling — H4 Low-Hydrogen Critical\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE10018-D2 MR is the highest-strength electrode in this product category — hydrogen control is the most important quality variable:\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUnopened MR can:\u003c\/strong\u003e Store in a dry location at ambient temperature. The hermetic seal maintains H4 condition indefinitely until opened.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAfter opening:\u003c\/strong\u003e Transfer immediately to a holding oven at 250–300°F (121–149°C). Use within 4 hours of oven removal.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReconditioning:\u003c\/strong\u003e Per AWS A5.5, recondition at 700–800°F (371–427°C) for 1 hour. MR-grade electrodes may be reconditioned once — this restores H4 designation. Do not recondition more than once or recondition cracked\/damaged coatings.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTraceability:\u003c\/strong\u003e For code work requiring documentation, record lot numbers and traceability per your quality system. The hermetic MR can supports lot traceability for weld procedure documentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-faq\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cdl\u003e\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is E10018-D2 used for?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eE10018-D2 is used for welding high-strength quenched-and-tempered structural steels (ASTM A514, A517, A709 Grade 100) and equivalent 100 ksi yield strength base metals in bridge fabrication, heavy construction equipment, mining structures, and offshore applications where AWS D1.1, D1.5, or ASME Section IX procedures require 100 ksi minimum tensile filler metal.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is the D2 alloy composition?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eThe D2 suffix in AWS A5.5 specifies a manganese-molybdenum alloy deposit with 1.65–2.0% Mn and 0.25–0.45% Mo. The Mn-Mo combination provides the strength and toughness combination required for high-strength structural applications. D1 specifies lower Mn and Mo; D2 provides higher strength for 100 ksi class applications.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eCan E10018-D2 be used on A514 steel?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eYes — E10018-D2 is one of the pre-qualified electrodes for ASTM A514 structural steel under AWS D1.1. The WPS must specify preheat (typically 125–225°F per D1.1 Table 3.2 depending on thickness), maximum interpass temperature (400°F), maximum heat input, and H4 low-hydrogen practice. Verify your specific A514 heat and thickness category against the D1.1 requirements before welding.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is the difference between E10018-D2 and E8018-C3?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eE8018-C3 deposits 80 ksi minimum tensile strength with a nickel-bearing composition for low-temperature toughness. E10018-D2 deposits 100 ksi minimum tensile with a Mn-Mo composition optimized for Q\u0026amp;T structural steel strength. Select E8018-C3 for 80 ksi applications requiring low-temperature CVN toughness (offshore, arctic); select E10018-D2 when the base metal or WPS requires 100 ksi minimum tensile filler metal.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n  \u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-crosslinks\"\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse all low-alloy electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — or compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-excalibur-9018-b3-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eLincoln Excalibur 9018-B3 MR\u003c\/a\u003e for Cr-Mo alloy steel applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is E10018-D2 used for?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"E10018-D2 is used for welding high-strength quenched-and-tempered structural steels (ASTM A514, A517, A709 Grade 100) in bridge fabrication, heavy construction equipment, mining structures, and offshore applications requiring 100 ksi minimum tensile filler metal.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can E10018-D2 be used on A514 steel?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes — E10018-D2 is pre-qualified for ASTM A514 structural steel under AWS D1.1. The WPS must specify preheat (125–225°F), maximum interpass temperature (400°F), maximum heat input, and H4 low-hydrogen practice.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the difference between E10018-D2 and E8018-C3?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"E8018-C3 deposits 80 ksi minimum tensile with nickel for low-temperature toughness. E10018-D2 deposits 100 ksi minimum tensile with Mn-Mo for Q\u0026T structural steel strength. Select E8018-C3 for 80 ksi low-temp toughness; select E10018-D2 when the WPS requires 100 ksi minimum tensile.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 25 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638090465431,"sku":"ED033162","price":196.93,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638091612311,"sku":"ED033163","price":399.57,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638092234903,"sku":"ED033164","price":398.08,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 50 lb","offer_id":43638104260759,"sku":"ED033330","price":384.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed033162-excalibur-10018-d2-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332x12-in-25-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594806"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-11018m-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 11018M MR E11018-M Stick Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-11018m-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 11018M MR\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.5\/A5.5M E11018-M SMAW stick electrode family with 110 ksi minimum tensile and DC+ or AC, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 6 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Excalibur 11018M MR\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 11018M MR is an AWS A5.5 E11018-M H4R low-hydrogen iron-powder basic-coated moisture-resistant SMAW electrode with 110 ksi minimum tensile, engineered for HSLA, high-strength quenched-and-tempered, and HY-80\/HY-100 steels in military, naval, offshore, and pressure-vessel fabrication. The H4R designation delivers up to 60% less moisture pickup than competitive E11018-M electrodes, sharply reducing hydrogen-induced cracking risk on the high-restraint joints typical of high-strength steel work. Runs DC+ in all positions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E11018-M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ or AC, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Excalibur 11018M MR from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638103769239,"sku":"ED031975","price":365.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638082994327,"sku":"ED032607","price":239.76,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638105145495,"sku":"ED031976","price":358.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638083911831,"sku":"ED032608","price":241.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638105276567,"sku":"ED031977","price":355.62,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638106718359,"sku":"ED031978","price":324.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed031975-excalibur-11018m-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332x14-in-50-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594627"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-2209-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 2209 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-2209-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 2209\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.4\/A5.4M E2209-15\/-16\/-17 SMAW stick electrode family with 100 ksi minimum tensile and DC+ (-15) or AC\/DC+ (-16\/-17), all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 4 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Excalibur 2209\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE2209 is an AWS A5.4 duplex stainless SMAW electrode with 100 ksi minimum tensile and a balanced 22 Cr \/ 9 Ni \/ 3 Mo \/ N duplex chemistry for welding 2205 and similar duplex stainless steels. The duplex structure delivers high strength plus excellent pitting\/crevice corrosion resistance in chloride environments - standard for marine, offshore, and chemical process service. Tight heat-input control required to maintain austenite\/ferrite balance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E2209-15\/-16\/-17\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ (-15) or AC\/DC+ (-16\/-17), all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Excalibur 2209 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 8 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639131930775,"sku":"ED034985","price":172.32,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639139106967,"sku":"ED034986","price":243.88,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639139205271,"sku":"ED034987","price":209.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639139532951,"sku":"ED034988","price":209.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed034985-excalibur-2209-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-12-in-8-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760720032"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-2594-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 2594 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-2594-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 2594\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.4\/A5.4M E2594-16 SMAW stick electrode family with 110 ksi minimum tensile and AC or DC+, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 4 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Excalibur 2594\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE2594-16 is an AWS A5.4 super-duplex stainless SMAW electrode with 110 ksi minimum tensile and ~25 Cr \/ 9.5 Ni \/ 4 Mo \/ 0.25 N chemistry, designed for welding super-duplex grades 2507 (UNS S32750) and Zeron 100 (UNS S32760) used in offshore oil and gas, chemical-process, and seawater service. Pitting Resistance Equivalent Number (PREN) exceeds 40, delivering exceptional pitting and crevice corrosion resistance. Heat input control (0.5-1.5 kJ\/mm) and interpass temperature ≤300  deg F are critical to maintain austenite-ferrite balance. Runs on AC or DC+ in all positions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E2594-16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC or DC+, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Excalibur 2594 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 8 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639131996311,"sku":"ED034989","price":25980.48,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639139270807,"sku":"ED034990","price":441.58,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639139401879,"sku":"ED034991","price":441.58,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639139303575,"sku":"ED034992","price":18759.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed034989-excalibur-2594-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-12-in-38-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760720032"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-308h-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 308H Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-308h-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 308H\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.4\/A5.4M E308-16 SMAW stick electrode family with 75 ksi minimum tensile and AC or DC+, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 4 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Excalibur 308H\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE308-16 is an AWS A5.4 austenitic stainless SMAW electrode with 75 ksi minimum tensile and ~19.5 Cr \/ 10 Ni chemistry, designed for welding 304 and 304H stainless steel and similar austenitic grades. The 308H variant has carbon controlled to 0.04-0.08% for high-temperature creep strength in 304H elevated-service applications (boiler superheaters, steam piping). The -16 lime-titania coating delivers smooth arc and easy slag removal. Runs on AC or DC+ in all positions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E308-16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC or DC+, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Excalibur 308H from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 8 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638119006359,"sku":"ED033083","price":198.32,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638120218775,"sku":"ED033084","price":229.98,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638120349847,"sku":"ED033085","price":162.72,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638120906903,"sku":"ED033086","price":188.67,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed033083-excalibur-308308h-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332x12-in-8-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594448"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-308l-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 308L Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 308L is a low-carbon E308L-16 stainless steel welding rod engineered to weld Type 304 and 304L austenitic stainless steel — the most widely used stainless steel grades in food processing, pharmaceutical manufacturing, architectural, and general industrial applications. With weld metal carbon content ≤ 0.04 % and a balanced 19–21 Cr \/ 9–11 Ni chemistry, Excalibur 308L prevents sensitization-induced intergranular corrosion while delivering smooth AC and DCEP arc performance in all positions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is the Lincoln Excalibur 308L Stainless Welding Rod?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExcalibur 308L is Lincoln Electric's premium E308L-16 SMAW electrode for Type 304 and 304L stainless steel. The AWS designation E308L-16 decodes as: \"E\" = electrode; \"308L\" = 18-8 chromium-nickel chemistry with low carbon (≤ 0.04 %); \"-16\" = rutile-basic flux enabling AC and DCEP welding in all positions. Like all Excalibur stainless rods, the 308L version uses tightly controlled flux chemistry to ensure consistent ferrite content (FN 3–10 typical), which prevents hot cracking in the austenitic weld metal during rapid solidification. The \"L\" (low carbon) classification means post-weld sensitization — the precipitation of chromium carbides that depletes HAZ chromium and creates corrosion pathways — does not occur even in thick multi-pass welds. This makes Excalibur 308L ideal for service involving aqueous, acidic, or food-contact media without post-weld solution annealing. Excalibur 308L is to 304\/304L stainless welding what Excalibur 7018 MR is to carbon-steel welding — a reliable, production-proven Lincoln flagship electrode.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Mechanical Specs — E308L-16 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Classification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eE308L-16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarbon (max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.04%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChromium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19.0–21.0%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNickel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e9.0–11.0%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e74,000 psi (510 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYield Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e54,000 psi (372 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRutile-basic (-16)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC, DCEP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePositions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32, 1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 35 % elongation minimum is among the highest for any AWS A5.4 electrode classification, confirming excellent ductility and impact toughness in the 308L weld metal — important for equipment subject to thermal cycling, vibration, or cryogenic service down to -320 °F.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for E308L-16 Stainless Welding Rods\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType 304 and 304L stainless steel piping, vessels, tanks, and sheet metal\u003c\/strong\u003e — the primary base metal application for E308L-16 weld metal.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFood processing and dairy equipment\u003c\/strong\u003e — sanitary stainless construction per 3-A dairy standards and FDA requirements for food-contact surfaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePharmaceutical vessels and bioreactors\u003c\/strong\u003e — USP water systems, CIP (clean-in-place) circuits, and sanitary fittings where passivation must be maintained.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eArchitectural and cladding stainless\u003c\/strong\u003e — handrails, facades, and trim work where appearance weld quality matters.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRepair welding of 304 stainless components\u003c\/strong\u003e — heat exchangers, process piping, storage tanks, and equipment in chemical and petrochemical plants.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDissimilar welds: 304 to 308, 304 to 304L, or 304 to 321\u003c\/strong\u003e — E308L-16 is conservative and compatible with standard and L-grade 304 family base metals.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCryogenic service\u003c\/strong\u003e — E308L weld metal remains ductile down to liquid nitrogen temperatures (-320 °F), making it suitable for cryogenic vessels and LNG\/LOX storage systems.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Excalibur 308L — Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDiameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical Use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50–75 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThin-wall pipe, sheet metal, root passes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70–110 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard piping, vessel walls, fittings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e95–140 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium-section vessels, structural\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in (4.8 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120–170 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy fill passes on thick plate\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey technique points for 308L stainless SMAW:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cem\u003eInterpass temperature:\u003c\/em\u003e Always keep below 300 °F (150 °C) between passes. Stainless holds heat poorly — more time between passes is required than with carbon steel of equivalent thickness.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cem\u003eArc length:\u003c\/em\u003e Keep tight — approximately 1× core diameter. Long arc length on stainless increases nitrogen and oxygen pickup from the atmosphere, promoting porosity and loss of corrosion resistance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cem\u003eStainless-dedicated wire brush:\u003c\/em\u003e Use only SS wire brushes between passes. Carbon-steel bristle contamination embeds iron particles that corrode and compromise the passive oxide layer of completed welds.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cem\u003eDistortion control:\u003c\/em\u003e Use tack welding sequences, back-step technique, and fixturing to minimize distortion on thin 304 sheet and plate. Stainless has 50 % higher thermal expansion than carbon steel and significant distortion without control.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling for E308L-16 Stainless Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed container:\u003c\/strong\u003e Store in original sealed Lincoln container in a dry area (below 70 % RH, 40–100 °F). Indefinite shelf life in sealed packaging.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRe-drying:\u003c\/strong\u003e If moisture-exposed, dry at 300–350 °F for 1–2 hours before use. Do not exceed 400 °F.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHolding oven:\u003c\/strong\u003e In high-humidity production shops, keep opened canisters in a 200–250 °F holding oven between uses.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eContamination prevention:\u003c\/strong\u003e Store stainless electrodes away from carbon-steel electrodes, grinding dust, and carbon-steel chips. Even residual iron contamination on the flux surface can cause arc instability and iron porosity in stainless welds.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types for E308L-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePrimary compatible base metals:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eType 304, 304L austenitic stainless (UNS S30400, S30403)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eType 302, 302B, 303 (for non-critical or general repair use)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eType 308, 308L\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eDissimilar: 304\/304L to 321 (note: for high-temperature 321 service involving creep, verify with metallurgical specialist)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eJoint types: all groove and fillet types in all positions. Follow ASME Section IX for pressure-containing joints. PWHT is not required and should be avoided for austenitic stainless — annealing in the sensitizing range defeats the purpose of the L-grade chemistry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Excalibur 308L E308L-16 Stainless Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the difference between E308-16 and E308L-16?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nE308L-16 limits carbon to ≤ 0.04 % vs. ≤ 0.08 % for E308-16. Low carbon prevents sensitization — the precipitation of chromium carbides at grain boundaries — which can lead to intergranular corrosion in welded joints exposed to aqueous media. For any food, pharmaceutical, or corrosion-critical application, specify E308L-16.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can I use 308L to weld 304H stainless?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n304H contains higher carbon (0.04–0.10 %) for elevated-temperature creep strength. E308L-16 does not match the elevated-temperature strength of 304H weld metal. For high-temperature service (above 1100 °F), use E308H-16. For ambient-temperature service or repair, E308L-16 is acceptable — confirm with the applicable code.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Why is the ferrite number important in 308L weld metal?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nA small amount of delta ferrite (FN 3–10) in the fully austenitic weld metal acts as a hot cracking inhibitor. Pure austenite has a continuous grain structure through which solidification cracks can propagate. Ferrite creates discontinuities that arrest crack propagation. Too much ferrite (FN \u0026gt; 15) reduces impact toughness and corrosion resistance. Lincoln controls Excalibur 308L flux to consistently deliver FN 4–8.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is E308L-16 suitable for cryogenic LNG service?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes. Austenitic stainless steel weld metal (E308L type) maintains excellent impact toughness down to -320 °F and is widely used for LNG, LOX, and liquid nitrogen service. Verify with the applicable design code (ASME Section VIII, BS EN 13458, etc.) for specific impact testing requirements at service temperature.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What cleaning process should I use before welding 304 stainless?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n(1) Degrease with acetone or isopropyl alcohol to remove all oils, greases, and cutting fluids; (2) Remove any mill scale, heavy oxides, or laser-cut dross with a stainless wire brush or abrasive flap disc; (3) Do not use carbon-steel tools that can embed iron particles; (4) Keep the joint clean and dry before welding. Do not touch cleaned surfaces with bare hands — skin oils cause porosity and affect the passive oxide layer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the best electrode size for thin-wall 304 tubing (Schedule 10, 2 in OD)?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nFor 2 in Schedule 10 pipe (0.109 in wall), use 3\/32 in E308L-16 at 55–70 A DCEP. The thin wall requires careful amperage control and short arc length to prevent burn-through. Back-purge with argon for root passes on pipe that will contact product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can I use E308L-16 on 316 stainless?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nE308L-16 lacks the molybdenum addition (2–3 %) present in 316 weld metal. In most general fabrication and repair situations, E308L-16 is used as a budget substitute for 316\/316L filler — the weld will have somewhat less pitting and crevice corrosion resistance in chloride environments. For service in chloride or acidic media, use E316L-16 to maintain full corrosion performance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the difference between E308-16 and E308L-16?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"E308L-16 limits carbon to 0.04% vs 0.08% for E308-16. Low carbon prevents sensitization and intergranular corrosion in food, pharma, and corrosion-critical applications.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Why is ferrite number important in 308L weld metal?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"FN 3-10 delta ferrite acts as a hot cracking inhibitor by creating discontinuities in the austenitic grain structure. Lincoln controls Excalibur 308L to FN 4-8.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is E308L-16 suitable for cryogenic LNG service?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. 308L weld metal maintains excellent toughness to -320°F and is widely used for LNG, LOX, and liquid nitrogen service.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What electrode size for thin-wall 2 in Schedule 10 304 pipe?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Use 3\/32 in E308L-16 at 55-70A DCEP with back-purge argon for product-contact pipe.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I use E308L-16 on 316 stainless?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes but it lacks the 2-3% Mo of 316 weld metal, reducing pitting resistance in chloride environments. Use E316L-16 for full corrosion performance on 316 service.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What cleaning is needed before welding 304 stainless?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Degrease with acetone; remove oxides with a stainless wire brush; use no carbon-steel tools; keep joint dry. Do not touch cleaned surfaces with bare hands.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I use E308L on 304H stainless?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"For ambient-temperature service E308L is acceptable. For high-temperature service above 1100°F use E308H-16 to match the creep strength of 304H.\"}}\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003e308L Stainless Welding Rod Technical Selection Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eType 304 and 304L austenitic stainless steel is the most widely used stainless grade in food service, pharmaceutical, architectural, and general industrial applications — accounting for approximately 50% of all stainless steel consumed globally. For any welding performed on 304\/304L, the E308L-16 electrode (Excalibur 308L) is the standard filler metal recommendation. The 18% chromium and 10% nickel in the weld metal deposit match the 304 alloy system, providing equivalent corrosion resistance and austenitic structure in the weld metal and HAZ. The L-grade carbon limitation (0.04% max) prevents sensitization — a critical concern for food processing, pharmaceutical, and water treatment applications where intergranular corrosion at weld HAZs would compromise product purity or pipe integrity. Passive film restoration (passivation) after welding — typically with nitric acid or citric acid solution per ASTM A380 or ASTM A967 — restores the full corrosion resistance of the weld and adjacent HAZ surface. For all food, pharmaceutical, and potable water applications, specify post-weld passivation in the fabrication procedure. Excalibur 308L provides the substrate quality (proper ferrite control, low carbon, clean slag) that supports effective passivation without corrosion-compromising defects in the weld surface.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can (ED033087)","offer_id":43638122741911,"sku":"ED033087","price":267.82,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can (ED033079)","offer_id":43638117040279,"sku":"ED033079","price":124.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can (ED033089)","offer_id":43638124052631,"sku":"ED033089","price":123.92,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 1 lb Tube (6-Pack)","offer_id":43638091579543,"sku":"ED033093","price":118.15,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638123135127,"sku":"ED033088","price":146.68,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638124576919,"sku":"ED033090","price":134.38,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 10 lb","offer_id":43638089089175,"sku":"ED033091","price":145.48,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638118711447,"sku":"ED033081","price":144.18,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (ED033092)","offer_id":43638091514007,"sku":"ED033092","price":212.18,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (ED033082)","offer_id":43638118678679,"sku":"ED033082","price":229.88,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/814 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638117499031,"sku":"ED033080","price":228.88,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed033087-excalibur-308308l-15-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332x12-in-8-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594447"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-309l-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 309L Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 309L is a premium low-carbon E309L-16 stainless steel welding rod engineered for welding dissimilar metal joints between stainless steel and carbon or low-alloy steel, as well as for stainless steel overlay cladding on carbon steel substrates. With its overalloyed 22–25 Cr \/ 12–14 Ni chemistry and extra-low carbon (≤ 0.04 %), Excalibur 309L provides the dilution buffer needed to maintain a corrosion-resistant austenitic weld metal even when significant carbon-steel base metal is melted into the joint. It is the E309L-16 stainless welding rod specified in virtually every dissimilar stainless-to-carbon-steel procedure and stainless overlay application.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is the Lincoln Excalibur 309L E309L-16 Welding Rod?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExcalibur 309L is Lincoln Electric's E309L-16 SMAW electrode for dissimilar and overlay welding. The AWS designation E309L-16 means: \"E\" = electrode; \"309L\" = overalloyed 22-25 Cr \/ 12-14 Ni chemistry with low carbon (≤ 0.04 %); \"-16\" = rutile-basic flux with AC and DCEP operation in all positions. The 309 chemistry is intentionally richer in chromium and nickel than 308 or 316 — this over-alloying is deliberate: when you weld a 309L electrode across a dissimilar joint where carbon steel dilutes the pool, the excess Cr and Ni in the wire compensate for that dilution and maintain a final weld metal composition with adequate chromium for corrosion resistance and adequate nickel for austenite stability. Without this buffer, carbon-steel dilution into a 308-type filler would shift the weld metal into a martensitic or ferritic composition with poor corrosion resistance and potential for cracking. The \"L\" designation (≤ 0.04 % carbon) ensures that even multi-pass dissimilar welds and multiple overlay layers do not sensitize and corrode in service. Excalibur 309L is the workhorse of stainless clad vessel fabrication and dissimilar weld repair throughout chemical processing, nuclear, power generation, and offshore industries.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Specs — E309L-16 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Classification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eE309L-16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarbon (max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.04%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChromium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22.0–25.0%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNickel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12.0–14.0%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e74,000 psi (510 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYield Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e54,000 psi (372 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRutile-basic (-16)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC, DCEP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePositions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32, 1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for E309L-16 Stainless Welding Rods\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDissimilar welds: stainless steel to carbon steel\u003c\/strong\u003e — piping transitions, flanged connections, and structural stainless-to-carbon attachment welds.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStainless overlay cladding on carbon steel\u003c\/strong\u003e — corrosion-resistant lining on the internal surfaces of carbon steel pressure vessels, tanks, and reactors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eButtering layer before welding 304\/316 stainless to carbon steel\u003c\/strong\u003e — E309L is applied as a buttering pass on the carbon steel side to create an austenitic transition layer before the final dissimilar joint weld.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRepair welding on stainless-clad pressure vessels\u003c\/strong\u003e — restoring cladding integrity on corroded or cracked stainless overlay on carbon steel shells.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh-temperature dissimilar welds (up to 800 °F service)\u003c\/strong\u003e — 309L provides adequate oxidation resistance and stability for moderate-temperature dissimilar service.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNuclear and power generation applications\u003c\/strong\u003e — E309L-16 is widely used for stainless-to-carbon dissimilar welds in nuclear island and balance-of-plant systems.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Excalibur 309L — Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDiameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eApplication\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThin wall, buttering passes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70–115 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard dissimilar joints, overlay\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100–145 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium-section overlay, fill passes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in (4.8 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e130–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy overlay and fill passes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDilution control:\u003c\/strong\u003e For overlay applications, minimize penetration into the carbon steel base to reduce dilution. Use stringer beads at lower amperage rather than weave passes at higher amperage. Two layers of E309L overlay typically achieve the target final chemistry. Verify that the corrosion-critical top layer of a two-layer overlay system has acceptable chemistry by analytical check if required by the pressure vessel code.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eButtering sequence:\u003c\/strong\u003e For dissimilar butt joints, butter the carbon steel side with one or two passes of E309L-16, then full joint welding with E308L-16 or E316L-16 (depending on the stainless base metal). This isolation prevents carbon-steel dilution from reaching the final weld metal composition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInterpass temperature:\u003c\/strong\u003e Keep below 300 °F as for all austenitic stainless electrodes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling for E309L-16 Stainless Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed container storage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Original sealed Lincoln container in a dry area (below 70 % RH). Indefinite shelf life sealed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRe-drying:\u003c\/strong\u003e 300–350 °F for 1–2 hours if moisture-exposed. Do not exceed 400 °F.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProduction shops:\u003c\/strong\u003e Keep opened canisters in 200–250 °F holding oven. Avoid storing near carbon-steel electrode ovens — iron-rich dust from other rods can contaminate stainless electrode coverings.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDedicated tools:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use stainless wire brushes only. Carbon contamination of stainless welds causes iron rusting and loss of passivity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types for E309L-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePrimary base metal combinations for Excalibur 309L:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e304\/304L stainless to A36, A516, A335, SA-516 carbon and low-alloy steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e316\/316L stainless to carbon steel (first pass butter; complete with E316L-16)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e321, 347 stabilized stainless to carbon steel (E309L is preferred over E308L for dilution control)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eClad vessel repair: stainless cladding to carbon steel shell\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDo not use E309L-16 as the sole filler for Type 309 base metal to Type 309 base metal joints — use E309-16 or E309L-16 per the applicable WPS. For austenitic-to-duplex or austenitic-to-ferritic stainless transitions, consult Lincoln's filler metal selection guide for the appropriate grade.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Excalibur 309L E309L-16 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Why do I need an overalloyed 309L filler for stainless-to-carbon-steel joints?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nWhen you arc-weld across a dissimilar joint, the base metals on both sides melt into the weld pool. Carbon steel dilutes the Cr-Ni content of a standard 308-type filler, potentially shifting the weld metal composition toward a martensitic or ferritic structure with poor corrosion resistance and risk of cold cracking. The over-alloyed 309L chemistry (22–25 Cr, 12–14 Ni) compensates for this dilution, maintaining a corrosion-resistant austenitic weld metal composition even with 30–40 % carbon steel dilution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How many layers of E309L overlay do I need on carbon steel?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nTwo layers minimum is the industry standard for ensuring the top surface of the overlay has adequate chemistry to meet Type 304 or 316 corrosion resistance requirements. The first layer is heavily diluted by the carbon steel base; the second layer is deposited on the first overlay, minimizing carbon steel dilution in the final surface. Some codes specify a minimum 3\/16 in finished overlay thickness and require chemical analysis of the surface layer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can E309L-16 be used to weld 309 stainless base metal to itself?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes. E309L-16 is appropriate for 309 to 309 joints in ambient-temperature service. For high-temperature service above 1800 °F where 309 base metal's chromium oxide scale resistance is needed, verify with Lincoln's high-temperature stainless guide for the appropriate procedure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the role of buttering in dissimilar metal welding?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nButtering applies a thin (1–2 pass) layer of 309L weld metal to the carbon steel side of the joint before the final assembly weld. After PWHT of the carbon steel (if required), the joint is completed with a stainless filler. Buttering prevents the PWHT thermal cycle from sensitizing the dissimilar weld metal and isolates the carbon steel heat treatment from the stainless side.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What interpass temperature applies for E309L on carbon steel base metal?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nInterpass temperature is controlled by the more restrictive base metal requirement. For carbon-steel base metal, AWS D1.1 preheat requirements apply to the steel side. For the stainless side, keep below 300 °F as for all austenitic stainless welds. For dissimilar joints, the practical limit is usually controlled by the stainless steel: keep below 300 °F regardless.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is E309L-16 approved for ASME Section IX?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes. E309L-16 is an F5 group filler metal under ASME Section IX QW-432 and is approved for use in procedure qualifications on carbon steel (P1), low-alloy (P4\/P5), and austenitic stainless (P8) base materials in dissimilar and overlay applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can I use E309L-16 instead of E309-16 to weld 309 stainless base metal?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes, E309L-16 is preferred over E309-16 for any application where heat input is significant or where post-weld sensitization is a concern. The L-grade is always conservative relative to the standard grade for ambient-temperature service.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Why do I need overalloyed 309L for stainless-to-carbon-steel joints?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Carbon steel dilutes Cr-Ni content of standard 308-type filler, risking martensitic or ferritic weld metal. The 309L's 22-25% Cr and 12-14% Ni compensates for up to 30-40% carbon steel dilution while maintaining austenitic structure.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How many overlay layers do I need with E309L?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Two layers minimum. The first layer is heavily diluted by carbon steel; the second layer achieves target corrosion-resistant chemistry. Most codes specify minimum 3\/16 in finished overlay thickness.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the role of buttering in dissimilar metal welding?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Buttering applies 1-2 layers of 309L to the carbon steel side before final assembly. It isolates any carbon-steel PWHT from the stainless side and prevents sensitization of the dissimilar weld metal.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is E309L-16 approved for ASME Section IX?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. E309L-16 is F5 group filler per ASME Section IX QW-432, approved for P1, P4\/P5, and P8 base materials in dissimilar and overlay applications.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can E309L be used to weld 309 stainless to itself?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. E309L-16 is appropriate for 309 to 309 joints in ambient-temperature service. Verify for very high temperature applications where 309 base metal is specified for scale resistance.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What interpass temperature for E309L on carbon steel?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Keep below 300°F for the stainless side; apply AWS D1.1 preheat for the carbon steel side. For dissimilar joints, 300°F is the practical interpass limit.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can E309L-16 replace E309-16?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. E309L-16 is preferred for any application with significant heat input or sensitization risk. It is always conservative relative to the standard grade for ambient-temperature service.\"}}\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003e309L Dissimilar Welding Technical Notes \u0026amp; Selection Guide\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDissimilar metal welding between stainless steel and carbon steel is one of the most technically demanding welding operations in process industry fabrication. The fundamental challenge is managing dilution: when the molten pool simultaneously melts both stainless steel (austenitic) and carbon steel (ferritic\/pearlitic), the resulting weld metal composition is a blend of both. If a standard 308L-type filler is used without compensation, carbon steel dilution shifts the weld metal out of the austenitic field into a duplex or martensitic microstructure — potentially brittle and certainly lacking the corrosion resistance needed for stainless service. Excalibur 309L's overalloyed chemistry (22–25% Cr, 12–14% Ni) is specifically designed to withstand 30–40% carbon steel dilution while remaining in the austenitic field on the Schaeffler or WRC-1992 constitution diagram. For engineers calculating expected dilution and predicting final weld metal composition, Lincoln provides Excalibur 309L's nominal deposit chemistry and a recommendation to consult the WRC-1992 diagram for specific dilution scenarios. Ferrite Number (FN) prediction from the diagram helps confirm that the final weld metal will have sufficient ferrite (FN 3–10) to resist hot cracking without excessive ferrite that would reduce toughness or corrosion resistance. The E309L-16 classification under AWS A5.4 ensures Lincoln's production chemistry control maintains this predictable behavior lot-to-lot.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can (ED033097)","offer_id":43638095577239,"sku":"ED033097","price":179.76,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can (ED033098)","offer_id":43638096265367,"sku":"ED033098","price":139.44,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack) (ED033100)","offer_id":43638097674391,"sku":"ED033100","price":122.16,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack) (ED033943)","offer_id":43639131668631,"sku":"ED033943","price":501.7,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638096396439,"sku":"ED033099","price":122.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack) (ED033101)","offer_id":43638098231447,"sku":"ED033101","price":211.35,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack) (ED033944)","offer_id":43639137599639,"sku":"ED033944","price":194.76,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (ED033095)","offer_id":43638092759191,"sku":"ED033095","price":200.28,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (ED033102)","offer_id":43638099214487,"sku":"ED033102","price":320.56,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638099804311,"sku":"ED033103","price":219.48,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed033097-excalibur-309309l-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332x12-in-3-8-lb-easy-open-cans-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594688"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-310-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 310-16 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-310-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 310-16\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.4\/A5.4M E310-16 SMAW stick electrode family with 80 ksi minimum tensile and AC or DC+, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 3 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Excalibur 310-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE310-16 is an AWS A5.4 fully-austenitic stainless SMAW electrode with 80 ksi minimum tensile and ~26 Cr \/ 21 Ni chemistry, designed for welding 310, 310S, and other heat-resistant austenitic grades in furnace, kiln, and high-temperature service up to 2000  deg F. The high chromium and nickel content provides excellent oxidation resistance and resistance to sulfidation. -16 lime-titania coating runs on AC or DC+ in all positions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E310-16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC or DC+, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Excalibur 310-16 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 8 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639131275415,"sku":"ED034993","price":225.52,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639137730711,"sku":"ED034994","price":240.45,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639137829015,"sku":"ED034995","price":274.28,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed034993-excalibur-310-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332x12-in-8-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760720059"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-316l-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 316L Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 316L is a premium low-carbon E316L-16 stainless steel welding rod engineered for welding Type 316, 316L, and related molybdenum-bearing austenitic stainless steel base metals. With a controlled 2–3 % molybdenum addition in the weld metal and extra-low carbon (≤ 0.04 %), Excalibur 316L delivers superior resistance to intergranular corrosion and pitting in chloride-bearing, acidic, and seawater environments. It is the E316L-16 stainless welding rod of choice for chemical process equipment, pharmaceutical vessels, food processing piping, marine hardware, and coastal architectural stainless.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is the Lincoln Excalibur 316L Stainless Welding Rod?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExcalibur 316L is Lincoln Electric's quality-grade E316L-16 SMAW electrode for austenitic 300-series stainless steel welding. The AWS classification E316L-16 means: \"E\" = electrode; \"316L\" = weld metal composition matching the 316L grade (18 Cr \/ 12 Ni \/ 2-3 Mo, carbon ≤ 0.04 %); \"-16\" = rutile-basic flux covering with AC and DCEP compatibility. The \"L\" designation (low carbon) is critical — by limiting carbon to 0.04 % maximum in the weld metal, the risk of chromium carbide sensitization along the weld heat-affected zone is eliminated. Sensitization occurs when carbon precipitates as chromium carbides at grain boundaries between 800–1500 °F, depleting the HAZ of chromium and creating pathways for intergranular corrosion. Excalibur 316L's low-carbon chemistry prevents this failure mode, making it safe to use for multi-pass welds and thick-section joints without post-weld annealing. The 2–3 % Mo addition enhances pitting resistance in chloride environments beyond what standard 304 or 308L weld metal provides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLincoln's Excalibur stainless rod line applies the same quality philosophy as the carbon-steel Excalibur 7018 series: premium flux chemistry, tight chemistry control, consistent coating concentricity, and DC-quality arc performance on both AC and DC machines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Specs — E316L-16 Stainless Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Classification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eE316L-16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeld Metal Carbon (max)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.04%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeld Metal Chromium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17–20%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeld Metal Nickel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e11–14%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeld Metal Molybdenum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.0–3.0%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e74,000 psi (510 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYield Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e54,000 psi (372 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRutile-basic (-16 type)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC, DCEP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePositions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32, 1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 30 % elongation minimum reflects austenitic stainless weld metal ductility — significantly higher than carbon steel electrodes, providing toughness for thermal cycling service. Ferrite content (FN 4–12 typical) provides resistance to solidification hot cracking during rapid cooling of austenitic weld metal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for E316L-16 Stainless Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eType 316 and 316L stainless steel vessels, piping, and tanks\u003c\/strong\u003e — the primary base metal for E316L-16 weld metal.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChemical process and pharmaceutical equipment\u003c\/strong\u003e — applications exposed to sulfuric acid, hydrochloric acid, phosphoric acid, and other corrosive media where Mo-bearing stainless is specified.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFood processing piping and dairy equipment\u003c\/strong\u003e — 316L is specified by FDA and 3-A dairy standards for product-contact surfaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMarine and coastal hardware\u003c\/strong\u003e — propeller shafts, through-hulls, brackets, and railings where seawater chloride pitting resistance is required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOffshore oil and gas process equipment\u003c\/strong\u003e — heat exchangers, manifolds, and valve bodies in saline or CO2-bearing service.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWelding 316 to 316L or 316 to 304\/304L\u003c\/strong\u003e — E316L-16 is conservative (lower carbon than E316-16) and compatible with both grades and their dissimilar combination.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Excalibur 316L — Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDiameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNotes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThin pipe and sheet, root passes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–115 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGeneral fabrication, piping\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100–145 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium-wall vessels and tanks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in (4.8 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e130–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy-section fill passes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInterpass temperature:\u003c\/strong\u003e Keep interpass temperature below 300 °F (150 °C) for stainless steel to prevent excessive grain growth, sigma phase precipitation risk, and sensitization in the HAZ. Stainless steel conducts heat poorly — allow adequate cooling between passes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHeat input control:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use the lowest practical amperage and travel speed that provides full fusion. Excessive heat input increases distortion and sensitization risk even with L-grade electrodes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBack-purge:\u003c\/strong\u003e For full-penetration pipe welds, back-purge with argon to prevent sugaring (oxidation) on the root ID. Stainless root surfaces must be bright silver — discolored or sugared roots are structurally compromised and prone to crevice corrosion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStainless-dedicated tools:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use stainless steel wire brushes (not carbon steel) for inter-pass cleaning. Carbon steel brush wires contaminate the stainless surface, creating embedded iron particles that rust and degrade corrosion resistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling for E316L-16 Stainless Stick Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExcalibur 316L is an -16 type (rutile-basic) electrode and is somewhat more moisture-sensitive than a plain rutile rod but less so than a strictly basic E316L-15 electrode. Storage guidance:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed container storage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Lincoln's sealed metal container maintains electrode condition indefinitely in a dry warehouse (below 70 % RH, 40–100 °F).\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRe-drying:\u003c\/strong\u003e If exposed to moisture, dry at 300–350 °F (150–175 °C) for 1–2 hours before use. Avoid baking above 400 °F — risk of flux damage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIn-use storage:\u003c\/strong\u003e For production environments, keep opened canisters in a 200–250 °F holding oven between uses if the shop is humid. Daily dry-out before first use is standard practice on high-purity stainless fabrication jobs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eElectrode handling:\u003c\/strong\u003e Never wipe stainless electrodes with carbon-steel contaminated gloves or rags. Contamination from iron particles causes surface rust on completed stainless welds.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types for E316L-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePrimary compatible base metals for Excalibur 316L:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eType 316, 316L austenitic stainless steel (UNS S31600, S31603)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eType 316Ti, 316Cb (stabilized variants — E316L-16 is compatible for most applications)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eType 316H (high carbon — use E316L-16 for welding to L-grade side; verify service requirements)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eDissimilar welds: 316\/316L to 304\/304L, to 317L, or to carbon steel overlays (with appropriate buttering)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eJoint types: all groove and fillet geometries. For pressure-containing joints on ASME code vessels, follow ASME Section IX procedure qualification requirements. PWHT is generally not required for austenitic stainless — in fact, PWHT in the sensitizing range (800–1500 °F) should be avoided with 316L weld metal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Excalibur 316L E316L-16 Stainless Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the difference between E316-16 and E316L-16?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe \"L\" designation indicates low carbon. E316-16 allows up to 0.08 % carbon in the weld metal; E316L-16 limits it to 0.04 %. The lower carbon in E316L-16 prevents chromium carbide sensitization, which is the precipitation of chromium carbides at grain boundaries after multi-pass welding or post-weld heat treatment in the 800–1500 °F range. Unless service specifically requires the higher strength of the non-L grade at elevated temperature, E316L-16 is the preferred specification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can I use E316L-16 to weld Type 316 (non-L) base metal?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes. E316L-16 is conservative relative to 316 base metal carbon content. It is routinely used to weld both 316 and 316L base metals, and their combination. The lower carbon weld metal does not affect service performance in most applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is back-purging and why is it needed for stainless root passes?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nBack-purging means filling the inside of the pipe (or back side of the groove) with argon shielding gas to exclude oxygen during welding. Stainless steel root passes exposed to atmospheric oxygen oxidize (called \"sugaring\") and form a thick, porous chromium-depleted layer that has no corrosion resistance. Back-purge argon flow rate: 5–15 CFH; purity: 99.9 % Ar minimum. Confirm root appearance: bright silver = acceptable; discolored or granular = re-weld or purge improvement needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What interpass temperature do I use for 316L SMAW?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nKeep interpass temperature below 300 °F (150 °C). Stainless steel is a poor heat conductor; it retains heat longer than carbon steel. Use a contact pyrometer or temperature sticks to verify interpass temperature before each pass on production pipe or vessels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can E316L-16 be used on 317L stainless?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nE316L-16 is acceptable for many 317L applications, but the 317L grade has 3–4 % Mo (vs. 2–3 % in 316L). For maximum corrosion resistance in the weld metal to match 317L service, use E317L-16. Consult Lincoln's filler metal selection guide or the applicable code for the specific application.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What power source do I need for Excalibur 316L?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nAny CC (constant-current) DC or AC power source is compatible. DCEP is preferred for best arc performance. AC works adequately on -16 type electrodes. Engine-driven machines and inverters both work well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How do I prevent porosity in stainless SMAW welds?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nMain causes: (1) moisture in the flux — dry at 300 °F before use if exposed to humidity; (2) oil or grease on the base metal — degrease with acetone before welding; (3) sulfur contamination from marking chalk or machining lubricants — clean thoroughly; (4) excessively long arc — keep arc length tight, 1× electrode core diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the difference between E316-16 and E316L-16?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"E316L-16 limits carbon to 0.04% vs 0.08% for E316-16. The lower carbon prevents chromium carbide sensitization after multi-pass welding. E316L-16 is preferred for most applications.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I use E316L-16 on Type 316 non-L base metal?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. E316L-16 is conservative relative to 316 base metal and is routinely used to weld both 316 and 316L, and their combination.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is back-purging and why is it needed?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Back-purging fills the pipe interior with argon to prevent oxygen from oxidizing (sugaring) the stainless root. Flow rate 5-15 CFH at 99.9% Ar purity. Root must be bright silver to pass.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What interpass temperature for 316L SMAW?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Keep interpass temperature below 300°F (150°C). Stainless retains heat longer than carbon steel — verify with a contact pyrometer before each pass.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can E316L-16 be used on 317L stainless?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"E316L-16 works for many 317L applications but 317L has 3-4% Mo vs 2-3% in 316L weld metal. For maximum corrosion resistance matching 317L, use E317L-16.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I prevent porosity in stainless SMAW welds?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Dry electrodes at 300°F before use; degrease base metal with acetone; remove marking chalk and lubricants; keep arc length tight at 1x electrode core diameter.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What power source do I need for E316L-16?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Any CC DC or AC power source. DCEP is preferred for best arc performance. Inverters and engine-driven machines both work well.\"}}\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003e316L Stainless Welding Rod Metallurgy \u0026amp; Technical Selection Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eType 316L stainless steel is the preferred material for chemical process equipment, pharmaceutical piping, marine hardware, and food processing systems because of its 2–3% molybdenum addition. Molybdenum shifts the critical pitting potential (Epit) of the passive oxide film to a more positive value, significantly increasing resistance to chloride-induced pitting and crevice corrosion. When welding 316L base metal, the filler metal must replicate this molybdenum content to maintain corrosion performance in the heat-affected zone and weld metal. Excalibur 316L ensures the deposited weld metal contains 2.0–3.0% Mo, matching the base metal specification. The -16 flux type (rutile-basic) in the E316L-16 designation ensures a stable, smooth arc on both AC and DCEP, with low porosity tendency and self-releasing slag suitable for flat, horizontal, vertical, and overhead positions. For applications requiring maximum pitting resistance (chloride concentrations above 1,000 ppm, elevated temperature seawater service, reducing acid service), specify E317L-16 weld metal instead — E317L has 3–4% Mo vs. 2–3% for E316L. For cost-sensitive general fabrication where 316 service conditions are moderate, Excalibur 316L provides reliable, code-compliant welding at an accessible price point. AWS A5.4 certifies all E316L-16 electrodes to specific chemistry limits, ensuring consistent corrosion performance across production lots.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can (ED033104)","offer_id":43638100525207,"sku":"ED033104","price":239.76,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can (ED033108)","offer_id":43638103900311,"sku":"ED033108","price":172.96,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can (ED033110)","offer_id":43638105243799,"sku":"ED033110","price":196.32,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638101442711,"sku":"ED033105","price":225.98,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (ED033106)","offer_id":43638101901463,"sku":"ED033106","price":284.68,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (ED033112)","offer_id":43638106488983,"sku":"ED033112","price":172.98,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638107308183,"sku":"ED033113","price":286.88,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in","offer_id":43638103605399,"sku":"ED033107","price":284.98,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/814 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638105702551,"sku":"ED033111","price":183.48,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Standard","offer_id":43638104686743,"sku":"ED033109","price":168.56,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed033104-excalibur-316316l-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332x12-in-8-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594686"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-321-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 321-16 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-321-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 321-16\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.4\/A5.4M E347-16 SMAW stick electrode family with 75 ksi minimum tensile and AC or DC+, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 3 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Excalibur 321-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE347-16 is an AWS A5.4 niobium-stabilized austenitic stainless SMAW electrode with 75 ksi minimum tensile and ~19 Cr \/ 10 Ni \/ Nb chemistry, designed for welding 347, 321, and other niobium- or titanium-stabilized austenitic grades used in high-temperature service. The niobium addition prevents knife-line attack at sustained 800-1500  deg F service temperatures. The lime-titania (-16) coating delivers smooth arc and X-ray quality welds. Runs on AC or DC+ in all positions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E347-16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC or DC+, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Excalibur 321-16 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639137534103,"sku":"ED034996","price":272.35,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639137763479,"sku":"ED034997","price":244.78,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639137992855,"sku":"ED034998","price":613.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed034996-excalibur-312-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod-18x14-in-10-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760720032"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-330-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 330-16 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-330-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 330-16\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.4\/A5.4M E330-16 SMAW stick electrode family with 85 ksi minimum tensile and AC or DC+, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 3 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Excalibur 330-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE330-16 is an AWS A5.4 austenitic stainless SMAW electrode with 85 ksi minimum tensile and ~35 Ni \/ 15 Cr chemistry for high-temperature service. Used to weld 330-series stainless and similar heat-resistant alloys in furnace, heat-treating, and oxidation-resistant fabrication to ~2000 F. Rutile coating (-16) runs on AC or DC+ in all positions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E330-16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e85 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC or DC+, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Excalibur 330-16 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 8 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639131308183,"sku":"ED035003","price":292.03,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639138713751,"sku":"ED035004","price":525.08,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639138746519,"sku":"ED035005","price":358.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed035003-excalibur-330-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-12-in-8-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760720059"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.4\/A5.4M E347-15\/-16\/-17 SMAW stick electrode family with 75 ksi minimum tensile and DC+ (-15) or AC\/DC+ (-16\/-17), all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 4 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Excalibur\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 347-16 is an AWS A5.4 E347-16 niobium-stabilized austenitic stainless SMAW electrode with 75 ksi minimum tensile, designed for welding 347, 321, and other niobium- or titanium-stabilized austenitic grades used in high-temperature service. The niobium addition ties up carbon and prevents intergranular corrosion (knife-line attack) at sustained 800-1500  deg F service temperatures. The lime-titania (-16) coating delivers smooth arc, easy slag removal, and X-ray quality welds. Runs on AC or DC+ in all positions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E347-15\/-16\/-17\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ (-15) or AC\/DC+ (-16\/-17), all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Excalibur from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 8 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639131799703,"sku":"ED035006","price":167.37,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639138779287,"sku":"ED035007","price":231.78,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639138844823,"sku":"ED035008","price":252.18,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43639139238039,"sku":"ED035009","price":231.78,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed035006-excalibur-347-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod-electrode-332-12-in-8-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760720059"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-385-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 385-16 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-385-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 385-16\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.4\/A5.4M E385-16 SMAW stick electrode family with 75 ksi minimum tensile and AC or DC+, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 3 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Excalibur 385-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE385-16 is an AWS A5.4 austenitic stainless SMAW electrode with 75 ksi minimum tensile and ~21 Cr \/ 25 Ni \/ 4.5 Mo \/ 1.5 Cu chemistry, designed for welding 904L (UNS N08904) and similar super-austenitic stainless steels used in concentrated sulfuric, phosphoric, and chloride-bearing acid service. The high molybdenum content delivers exceptional pitting and crevice corrosion resistance. -16 lime-titania coating runs on AC or DC+ in all positions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E385-16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC or DC+, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Excalibur 385-16 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 8 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639131701399,"sku":"ED036502","price":281.92,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639139041431,"sku":"ED035010","price":355.55,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 10 lb","offer_id":43639139172503,"sku":"ED035011","price":254.64,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed036502-excalibur-385-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-12-in-8-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760720059"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-stick-smaw-welding-rod-1","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 410-16 Stainless Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-stick-smaw-welding-rod-1 | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 410-16 Stainless\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.4\/A5.4M E410-15\/-16 SMAW stick electrode family with 75 ksi minimum tensile and DC+ (-15) or AC\/DC+ (-16), all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 3 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Excalibur 410-16 Stainless\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 410-16 is an AWS A5.4 E410-16 martensitic stainless SMAW electrode with 75 ksi minimum tensile and ~12% Cr chemistry, designed for welding 410 and similar straight-chromium martensitic stainless grades and for corrosion-resistant overlay on carbon and low-alloy steels. The titania-lime coating delivers smooth, stable arc and easy slag removal. Preheat 400-600  deg F and post-weld heat treatment are required to prevent cracking. Runs on AC or DC+ in all positions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E410-15\/-16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ (-15) or AC\/DC+ (-16), all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Excalibur 410-16 Stainless from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639138812055,"sku":"ED035012","price":170.87,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639138877591,"sku":"ED035013","price":131.52,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639139139735,"sku":"ED035014","price":131.52,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed035012-excalibur-410-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod-18-14-in-10-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760720031"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-410nimo-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 410NiMo Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-410nimo-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 410NiMo\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.4\/A5.4M E410NiMo-15\/-16 SMAW stick electrode family with 110 ksi minimum tensile and DC+ (-15) or AC\/DC+ (-16), all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 3 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Excalibur 410NiMo\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE410NiMo is an AWS A5.4 modified martensitic stainless SMAW electrode with 110 ksi minimum tensile and a Ni-Mo addition that lowers martensite-start temperature, improving weldability and reducing cracking risk vs straight E410. Standard choice for hydroelectric turbine repair, large pump shafts, and CA6NM cast martensitic stainless components. Runs DC+ (-15) or AC\/DC+ (-16) in all positions; controlled preheat and PWHT typically specified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E410NiMo-15\/-16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 ksi minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ (-15) or AC\/DC+ (-16), all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Excalibur 410NiMo from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639138910359,"sku":"ED035015","price":203.08,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639138943127,"sku":"ED035016","price":226.88,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639138975895,"sku":"ED035018","price":529.56,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed035015-excalibur-410nimo-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod-18-14-in-10-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760720031"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-630-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 630-16 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-excalibur-630-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 630-16\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.4\/A5.4M E630-16 SMAW stick electrode family with 135 ksi minimum (post-aging) tensile and AC or DC+, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 4 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Excalibur 630-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE630-16 is an AWS A5.4 precipitation-hardening stainless SMAW electrode with 135 ksi minimum post-aging tensile and ~16.5 Cr \/ 4.75 Ni \/ 3.4 Cu chemistry (matching 17-4 PH \/ UNS S17400). Designed for welding 17-4 PH and similar martensitic precipitation-hardening stainless grades used in aerospace, valve, and pump components where high strength plus corrosion resistance is required. Post-weld solution treatment (1900  deg F) and aging (H900-H1150) are required to reach full mechanical properties. Runs on AC or DC+ in all positions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E630-16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e135 ksi minimum (post-aging)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC or DC+, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Excalibur 630-16 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 8 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639131898007,"sku":"ED035019","price":151.97,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639139008663,"sku":"ED035020","price":224.98,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639139336343,"sku":"ED035021","price":181.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43639139074199,"sku":"ED035022","price":181.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed035019-excalibur-630-16-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-12-in-8-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric-1.jpg?v=1760720033"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-7018-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 7018 MR Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 v1 parent body — auto-rendered from grade card lincoln-excalibur-7018-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod on 2026-05-20 --\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018 MR Low-Hydrogen Stick Electrode\u003c\/strong\u003e is a low-hydrogen iron-powder basic-coated moisture-resistant SMAW electrode classified to \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7018 H4R\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is engineered for code-quality fabrication on mild and low-alloy steels where diffusible hydrogen control, excellent puddle visibility, and superior out-of-position operability are required — making it a benchmark choice for power generation, petrochemical, and structural work. The H4R designation, combined with Lincoln Electric's proprietary moisture-resistant coating technology, delivers up to 60% less moisture pickup versus competitive E7018 electrodes, reducing the risk of hydrogen-induced cracking in demanding field and shop environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"per161-tldr\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eKey takeaways\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClassification:\u003c\/strong\u003e AWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7018 H4R\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBest for:\u003c\/strong\u003e All-position low-hydrogen welding on mild steel and low-alloy steel in structural, pressure vessel, and process piping applications\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity:\u003c\/strong\u003e DC+ or AC\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePositions:\u003c\/strong\u003e All positions except vertical down\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAvailable diameters:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, 5\/32 in, 3\/16 in, 7\/32 in, 1\/4 in\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAWS Classification: \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7018 H4R\u003c\/strong\u003e\n\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCoating: Low-hydrogen iron-powder basic (lime-fluoride) coating with moisture-resistant H4R designation; formulated to resist moisture pickup up to 60% better than competitive E7018 electrodes\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePolarity: DC reverse polarity (DCEP\/electrode positive) preferred for optimum arc stability; AC is also acceptable on machines with adequate open-circuit voltage; Lincoln publishes slightly higher AC amperage ranges than DC+ ranges\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eWelding positions: All positions including vertical-up and overhead, except vertical down; larger diameters (3\/16 in and above) recommended for flat and horizontal positions only\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHydrogen designator: H4R (≤4 mL H₂\/100 g deposited weld metal; moisture-resistant coating — 60% less moisture pickup vs. competition)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eTypical amperage: 70–110 A DC+ \/ 80–120 A AC (3\/32 in); 90–160 A DC+ \/ 100–160 A AC (1\/8 in); 130–210 A DC+ \/ 140–210 A AC (5\/32 in); 180–300 A DC+ \/ 200–300 A AC (3\/16 in); 250–330 A DC+ \/ 270–370 A AC (7\/32 in); 300–400 A DC+ \/ 325–420 A AC (1\/4 in)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eCharpy V-notch impact: 27 J (20 ft·lbf) min @ -29 °C (-20 °F) per AWS E7018 H4R; typical 121–332 J (89–246 ft·lbf) @ -29 °C (-20 °F)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAvailable diameters: 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, 5\/32 in, 3\/16 in, 7\/32 in, 1\/4 in\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePack sizes: 8 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack), 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack), 50 lb Easy Open Can, 50 lb Easy Open Can (Buy America)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAvailable variants \u0026amp; part numbers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable class=\"per161-variants\"\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDiameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePack size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer part number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED033940\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED032588\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 lb Easy Open Can\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED028280\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 lb Easy Open Can (Buy America)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED033868\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED032589\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED033838\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 lb Easy Open Can (Buy America)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED033869\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 lb Easy Open Can\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED028281\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED033839\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED032590\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 lb Easy Open Can\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED028282\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 lb Easy Open Can\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED033870\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 lb Easy Open Can\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED028283\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 lb Easy Open Can (Buy America)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED033871\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 lb Easy Open Can\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED034307\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 lb Easy Open Can\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED038367\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 lb Easy Open Can\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eED038368\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eApplications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExcalibur 7018 MR is purpose-built for code-driven all-position welding on mild and low-alloy steels:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eStructural steel fabrication and erection (AWS D1.1 code work)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePressure vessel fabrication and repair (ASME Section VIII)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePower generation equipment and boiler components\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePressure piping and pipefitting (ASME B31.1 \/ B31.3)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003ePetrochemical plant construction and maintenance\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eShipbuilding and marine structural assemblies\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eGeneral mild steel fabrication requiring low-hydrogen deposits\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to use Excalibur 7018 MR\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003col\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eStore unopened cans in a clean, dry area; once opened, hold rods in a heated rod oven at 250–300°F until use to maintain H4R diffusible hydrogen levels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eIf electrodes have been exposed to atmosphere for more than a few hours after opening, recondition by baking at 500–550°F for 1 hour before use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSet the welding machine to DC+ (electrode positive) for best arc stability and weld quality; AC is acceptable on smaller machines — use the AC amperage range in that case.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSelect amperage within the published range for the diameter in use: 70–110 A DC+ for 3\/32 in, 90–160 A DC+ for 1\/8 in, 130–210 A DC+ for 5\/32 in; for out-of-position work, dial to the lower one-third of the range.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eStrike the arc with a brief tap-and-drag; maintain a short arc length (approximately equal to the electrode diameter) to minimize hydrogen pickup and spatter.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eUse stringer beads or narrow weaves; limit weave width to 2–3× electrode diameter — the Excalibur 7018 MR's square coating burn-off and self-peeling slag facilitate clean multi-pass runs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAllow each pass to cool to interpass temperature (≤300°F unless the WPS specifies otherwise); remove slag completely between passes; return unused rods to the heated oven after welding.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExcalibur 7018 MR vs related grades\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCompared to standard E6013 (rutile, mild steel), E7018 delivers approximately 10 ksi higher tensile strength and far lower diffusible hydrogen — making it mandatory for crack-sensitive, code-governed work where E6013 is inadequate. Compared to E7018-1 H4R (the tougher sibling with Charpy requirement at -46°C vs. E7018's -29°C), the standard 7018 MR is the more economical choice for applications that do not require assured toughness at temperatures below -20°F. Stepping up to E8018-C3 or E9018-M adds low-alloy or Ni-Mo alloying for higher tensile strength and better low-temperature toughness on alloy steels, but neither is needed for mild steel work where Excalibur 7018 MR provides the optimal balance of performance, operability, and value.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"per161-faq-item\"\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eWhat is the AWS classification of Lincoln Excalibur 7018 MR?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe Excalibur 7018 MR is classified AWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7018 H4R — a mild steel, low-hydrogen iron-powder electrode with a moisture-resistant coating that limits diffusible hydrogen to ≤4 mL per 100 g of deposited weld metal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"per161-faq-item\"\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eCan Excalibur 7018 MR run on AC or DC?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eYes — it runs on both DC+ (electrode positive) and AC. DC+ is preferred for the smoothest arc and best mechanical properties. On AC, use the slightly higher amperage ranges published by Lincoln (e.g., 80–120 A AC vs. 70–110 A DC+ for 3\/32 in diameter).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"per161-faq-item\"\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eWhat does the MR (Moisture Resistant) designation mean?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eMR indicates the coating is specially formulated to resist moisture reabsorption from the atmosphere. Lincoln Electric's Excalibur 7018 MR picks up 60% less moisture than competitive E7018 electrodes, reducing the risk of hydrogen-induced cold cracking — especially important in humid or outdoor environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"per161-faq-item\"\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eDo I need to bake or recondition these electrodes before use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eUnopened cans do not require baking if stored properly in a dry location. Once opened, hold rods in a heated rod oven at 250–300°F. If rods have been out of the oven for an extended period, recondition at 500–550°F for 1 hour to restore H4R hydrogen levels before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails class=\"per161-faq-item\"\u003e\n  \u003csummary\u003eWhat positions can I weld in with Excalibur 7018 MR?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAll positions except vertical down — including flat, horizontal, vertical-up, and overhead. For out-of-position work, set amperage to the lower portion of the published range for the diameter. Note that the larger diameters (3\/16 in and above) are best suited for flat and horizontal positions only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eShop \u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018 MR Low-Hydrogen Stick Electrode\u003c\/strong\u003e at WeldingMart.com — competitive pricing, fast shipping, and the largest in-stock selection of Lincoln Electric SMAW consumables. Backed by Lincoln Electric's Q2 Lot® quality system — with actual deposit chemistry and mechanical test results available online — and the Excalibur brand's decades of proven performance as the industry's benchmark low-hydrogen stick electrode for structural, pressure vessel, and process piping applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"per161-internal-links\" aria-label=\"Related stick electrodes\"\u003e\n  \u003ch3\u003eRelated stick electrodes\u003c\/h3\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n        \u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003estick welding electrodes\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n        \u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/harris-e7018-mild-steel-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eHarris E7018\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n        \u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-7018-ac-rsp-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003e7018-AC RSP\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n        \u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-7018-ac-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eLincoln 7018-AC\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638098362519,"sku":"ED033940","price":198.72,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638111043735,"sku":"ED032588","price":167.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638082961559,"sku":"ED028280","price":244.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (Buy America)","offer_id":43638112485527,"sku":"ED033868","price":308.68,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack) (ED032589)","offer_id":43638112354455,"sku":"ED032589","price":167.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack) (ED033838)","offer_id":43638098428055,"sku":"ED033838","price":229.75,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (Buy America)","offer_id":43638112649367,"sku":"ED033869","price":287.96,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":47611296383127,"sku":"ED028281","price":236.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack) (ED033839)","offer_id":43638099017879,"sku":"ED033839","price":242.08,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack) (ED032590)","offer_id":43638113599639,"sku":"ED032590","price":167.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED028282)","offer_id":43638084599959,"sku":"ED028282","price":236.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED033870)","offer_id":43638114713751,"sku":"ED033870","price":287.39,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED028283)","offer_id":43638085681303,"sku":"ED028283","price":240.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (Buy America)","offer_id":43638115434647,"sku":"ED033871","price":329.54,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED034307)","offer_id":43638120972439,"sku":"ED034307","price":230.96,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED038367)","offer_id":47647590875287,"sku":"ED038367","price":0.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/4 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":47647590908055,"sku":"ED038368","price":0.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed033940-excalibur-7018-mr-n-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-14-in-3-8-lb-easy-open-cans-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594687"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-7018-a1-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003ch2\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR — What Is E7018-A1?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR\u003c\/strong\u003e is an \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E7018-A1 H4R\u003c\/strong\u003e iron powder\/low-hydrogen SMAW electrode for welding carbon-molybdenum (C-Mo) low-alloy steels on \u003cstrong\u003eDC+ (DCEP)\u003c\/strong\u003e in all positions. The \"-A1\" classification designates a 0.5% molybdenum alloyed deposit — the key distinction from standard E7018 (AWS A5.1). The 0.5 Mo addition shifts Excalibur 7018-A1 from an AWS A5.1 carbon steel electrode into the AWS A5.5 low-alloy category, providing enhanced tensile strength, creep resistance, and elevated-temperature properties needed for P-No. 3 Group 1 materials (1\/2 Mo steel, ASTM A204), pressure vessel steels (A302 Grade A), and applications that operate at temperatures above the carbon steel service range. The H4R designation confirms hydrogen control to ≤4 mL\/100g and moisture-resistant coating for extended out-of-oven storage in field environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable style=\"min-width: 50px\"\u003e\n\u003ccolgroup\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003c\/colgroup\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E7018-A1 H4R\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eCoating type\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eIron powder \/ low-hydrogen (moisture-resistant)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003ePolarity\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eDC+ (DCEP) — do not use AC\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAll positions: 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWeld metal Mo content\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e~0.5% Mo (nominal)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin tensile strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e70,000 psi (483 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin yield strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e57,000 psi (393 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eElongation\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e22% minimum\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMax diffusible hydrogen\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e≤4 mL\/100g (H4 designation)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoisture resistance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eR designation — extended out-of-oven exposure allowed per AWS D1.1\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eCharpy V-notch impact\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003ePer AWS A5.5 requirements\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e3\/32 in: 70–100 A | 1\/8 in: 90–150 A | 5\/32 in: 120–200 A\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eLincoln Electric\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E7018-A1 H4R\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eP-No. 3 Group 1 pressure vessels (1\/2 Mo steel):\u003c\/strong\u003e ASTM A204 Grades A, B, C — the primary low-alloy 0.5 Mo material requiring E7018-A1 matched filler for ASME Section I and Section VIII vessels\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCarbon-molybdenum piping:\u003c\/strong\u003e ASTM A335 Grade P1 (0.5 Mo chrome-moly piping) in power generation, refining, and petrochemical facilities where operating temperatures exceed mild steel service range\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eElevated temperature service (up to ~900°F \/ 480°C):\u003c\/strong\u003e Applications where creep resistance and 0.5 Mo alloying are required to maintain weld joint integrity at operating temperatures above the E7018 (carbon steel) service ceiling\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePower generation low-alloy steel:\u003c\/strong\u003e Turbine casings, valve bodies, and pipe connections fabricated from A204, A302 Grade A, or P1 chrome-moly materials\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eH4R field welding where extended rod storage is needed:\u003c\/strong\u003e The moisture-resistant coating allows significantly longer out-of-oven exposure than standard E7018 — ideal for remote field sites and pipeline field welding where holding oven availability is limited\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Excalibur 7018-A1 MR (Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position)\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity:\u003c\/strong\u003e DC+ (DCEP) ONLY — the A5.5 low-alloy designation does not permit AC operation. Use a DC welding machine. Do not attempt to run E7018-A1 on AC.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAmperage:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1\/8 in: 90–150 A. Same range as Excalibur 7018 MR. Use mid-range (100–130 A) for multi-pass structural work; higher end for flat and horizontal fill passes on thick material; lower end for vertical and overhead.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreheat and interpass temperature:\u003c\/strong\u003e Follow the applicable code preheat table for P-No. 3 material — typically 200–300°F (93–149°C) preheat for A204 and similar 0.5 Mo steels depending on section thickness and carbon equivalent. Interpass temperature control is critical for maintaining mechanical properties in low-alloy deposits.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePost-weld heat treatment (PWHT):\u003c\/strong\u003e Per ASME Section VIII and applicable code, P-No. 3 materials typically require PWHT at 1100–1200°F (593–649°C) to reduce residual stress and improve toughness in the low-alloy weld deposit. Follow the applicable code and WPS for hold time and cooling rate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eArc length:\u003c\/strong\u003e Short arc length critical for H4 hydrogen control — same discipline as E7018 MR. Tight arc minimizes atmospheric hydrogen pickup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOut-of-oven time:\u003c\/strong\u003e H4R designation allows extended out-of-oven exposure (9 hours at temperatures up to 80°F per AWS D1.1 Table 4.5) compared to standard E7018. For code work, confirm the specific rod exposure limits in the applicable standard.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eR (moisture-resistant) coating advantage:\u003c\/strong\u003e The MR designation provides substantially longer out-of-oven exposure compared to standard E7018 — per AWS D1.1, H4R electrodes are allowed significantly extended time-out limits before redrying is required\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore in sealed original packaging at ambient temperature before opening\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnce opened, store in a holding oven at 250–300°F (121–149°C) for code-critical applications; moisture-resistant coating allows longer out-of-oven exposure for general work\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor redrying: 500–800°F (260–427°C) for 1–2 hours; do not exceed manufacturer's redry temperature\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eNever mix with standard E7018 — the A5.5 low-alloy classification is critical for matching base metal requirements\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMatched 0.5 Mo steels:\u003c\/strong\u003e ASTM A204 Gr. A\/B\/C (Mo-alloyed pressure vessel plate), A302 Gr. A (Mn-Mo plate), A335 P1 piping, A234 WP1 fittings\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAlso used for:\u003c\/strong\u003e Joining P-No. 3 to P-No. 1 (carbon steel) when transitional weld metal provides sufficient tensile and toughness properties for the design\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot for Cr-Mo steels:\u003c\/strong\u003e E7018-A1 is 0.5% Mo only, no chromium — for 1¼ Cr-½ Mo steel (P22), use E8018-B2; for 2¼ Cr-1 Mo (P22), use E9018-B3; for Grade 91 (9Cr-1Mo-V), use the appropriate Chromet electrode\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint types:\u003c\/strong\u003e All groove configurations and fillet welds per ASME Section IX and AWS D1.1 with appropriate WPS documentation for low-alloy materials\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is E7018-A1 welding rod used for?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR is used for welding 0.5% molybdenum low-alloy steels — primarily ASTM A204 pressure vessel plate, A335 P1 piping, and P-No. 3 Group 1 materials in power generation, refining, and petrochemical applications where elevated-temperature creep resistance is required. The 0.5 Mo deposit exceeds plain carbon steel electrode capability for service above ~800°F.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the difference between E7018 and E7018-A1?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eE7018 (AWS A5.1) is a carbon steel electrode with no alloying elements. E7018-A1 (AWS A5.5) contains 0.5% molybdenum in the weld deposit — this molybdenum addition improves elevated-temperature tensile strength, creep resistance, and matches the composition of 0.5 Mo low-alloy base metals. The practical difference: use E7018 for carbon steel A36\/A572 structural work; use E7018-A1 for ASTM A204 and P-No. 3 pressure vessel and piping work that requires matched filler metal.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDoes E7018-A1 require preheat?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor most ASTM A204 and A335 P1 0.5 Mo steel applications, preheat in the range of 200–300°F (93–149°C) is required depending on section thickness and carbon equivalent. Follow the applicable code (ASME Section VIII, ASME B31.1\/B31.3, AWS D1.1) and the qualified WPS for your specific base material and joint design. Preheat for low-alloy steels is more demanding than for carbon steel due to increased hardenability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is H4R on an electrode?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eH4 means the electrode is certified to ≤4 mL diffusible hydrogen per 100g of weld metal — the most demanding hydrogen control level in AWS A5.1\/A5.5. R (moisture-resistant) means the electrode coating has been tested to maintain its low-hydrogen performance after extended atmospheric exposure (per AWS A4.3). H4R electrodes provide maximum hydrogen control combined with moisture resistance — critical for fracture-critical structural, pressure vessel, and pipeline applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCan E7018-A1 be used instead of E7018 on carbon steel?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes — E7018-A1 can be used on carbon steel and will produce a weld with adequate mechanical properties for most A36\/A572 structural applications. The 0.5 Mo deposit on carbon steel does not cause problems. However, E7018-A1 (A5.5) costs more than E7018 (A5.1) and the Mo alloying provides no benefit on carbon steel — use standard E7018 for carbon steel work and reserve E7018-A1 for applications where 0.5 Mo filler is required by the WPS or code.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDoes E7018-A1 require PWHT?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor code work on P-No. 3 materials (A204, P1 pipe), PWHT is typically required per ASME Section VIII and ASME B31.1\/B31.3 at 1100–1200°F (593–649°C). For AWS D1.1 structural applications, PWHT requirements depend on base material, thickness, and the WPS. Always follow the applicable code and qualified WPS — PWHT on low-alloy steel is not optional for most code applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat Excalibur electrode should I use for 2¼ Cr-1 Mo steel (P22)?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor P22 (ASTM A387 Grade 22, A335 P22 — 2¼ Cr-1 Mo steel), use Lincoln Excalibur 9018-B3 MR (AWS E9018-B3 H4R), not E7018-A1. The B3 designation provides the matched 2.25% Cr and 1% Mo composition required for P22 base metals. E7018-A1's 0.5 Mo without chromium is not appropriate for P22 applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse all stick electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — see also \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-excalibur-7018-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eExcalibur 7018 MR\u003c\/a\u003e for standard carbon steel structural work, or \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-excalibur-9018-b3-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eExcalibur 9018-B3 MR\u003c\/a\u003e for 2¼ Cr-1 Mo (P22) alloy steel applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOrdering Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis Lincoln Electric product ships from WeldingMart — add Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR to your cart and place your order. We stock the Excalibur 7018-A1 MR for power generation, boiler, and pressure vessel fabricators who depend on this electrode for PWHT applications. Create a WeldingMart account to manage your order history and reorder this product quickly for ongoing project needs. In-stock Excalibur 7018-A1 orders ship same day. Select your preferred diameter and package configuration from the variant picker before adding to cart. Questions about this product before you order? Contact our welding application specialists for technical guidance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include tubing. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include tubing. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in to 1\/2 in (4.8–12.7 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat\/horizontal preferred\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR include: e7018 a1, stick electrode, 7018 a1, rods, e7018 a1 h4r, a1 h4r, low hydrogen, low alloy, diameters, buy, welding, electrode. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in to 1\/2 in (4.8–12.7 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat\/horizontal preferred\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR include: e7018 a1, stick electrode, 7018 a1, rods, e7018 a1 h4r, low hydrogen, low alloy, a1 h4r, buy, diameters, welding rod, ac. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in to 1\/2 in (4.8–12.7 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat\/horizontal preferred\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Lincoln Excalibur 7018-A1 MR include: e7018 a1, stick electrode, 7018 a1, rods, e7018 a1 h4r, low hydrogen, low alloy, buy, welding rod, a1 h4r, pressure vessels, ideal. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in, 8 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638099968151,"sku":"ED032893","price":198.36,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in, 25 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638090039447,"sku":"ED032875","price":187.62,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638089056407,"sku":"ED032873","price":240.29,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638090596503,"sku":"ED032876","price":351.97,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638091776151,"sku":"ED032877","price":357.11,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed032893-excalibur-7018-a1-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332x12-in-3-8-lb-easy-open-cans-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594687"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-7028-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 7028 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7028 is a high-deposition low-hydrogen E7028 welding rod designed for maximum productivity flat and horizontal fillet welds on mild carbon steel. The E7028 classification features a heavy iron-powder, low-hydrogen flux covering that delivers the highest deposition efficiency of any AWS A5.1 electrode — up to 145 % deposition efficiency — making Excalibur 7028 the preferred E7028 welding rod for high-volume flat and horizontal welding production on structural steel fabrication lines, offshore platform construction, and pressure vessel shops where fillet weld volume is critical.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is the Lincoln Excalibur 7028 E7028 Welding Rod?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExcalibur 7028 is Lincoln Electric's high-productivity E7028 low-hydrogen iron-powder SMAW electrode. The AWS classification E7028 decodes as: \"E\" = electrode; \"70\" = 72,000 psi minimum tensile strength; \"2\" = flat and horizontal fillet positions only (not all-position); \"8\" = low-hydrogen iron-powder flux covering, DCEP or AC. The position limitation to flat (F) and horizontal (H) fillet is deliberate: E7028 carries significantly more iron powder in its flux coating than E7018 — this thick covering with high iron-powder loading produces extremely fast deposition rates and a very wide, flat bead profile, but the thick slag must freeze flat. Running E7028 in vertical or overhead positions is not possible — the flux geometry and slag fluidity prevent it. This is the fundamental trade-off: you exchange positional flexibility for maximum deposition rate in flat and horizontal work. For production shops where 80–90 % of welding is flat or horizontal fillet welds, this trade-off is highly favorable. Excalibur 7028 carries Lincoln's H4R hydrogen designation — diffusible hydrogen ≤ 4 mL\/100g — providing the same hydrogen control as E7018-H4R in a dramatically more productive flat\/horizontal electrode.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Specs — E7028 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eValue\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Classification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eE7028\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH-Designation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH4R (≤ 4 mL\/100g diffusible H2)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e72,000 psi (496 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYield Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60,000 psi (414 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDeposition Efficiency\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e~145% (highest in AWS A5.1)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow-hydrogen iron-powder (heavy coating)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC, DCEP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePositions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat (1F) and Horizontal Fillet (2F) only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16, 7\/32, 1\/4 in (large diameters typical)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE7028 is rated at 22 % elongation — higher than E7018 at 22 % but both reflect good ductility from the low-hydrogen iron-powder chemistry. The H4R designation is critical: unlike non-low-hydrogen rods (E6013, E7014), E7028 must be stored in a 250–300 °F holding oven after the container is opened to maintain ≤ 4 mL\/100g diffusible hydrogen. This storage requirement is identical to E7018 and E8018 low-hydrogen rods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for E7028 Welding Rods\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh-volume flat fillet welds on structural steel fabrication lines\u003c\/strong\u003e — connecting beam flanges, gussets, base plates, and stiffeners where F and H positions dominate.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOffshore oil and gas platform jackets and topsides\u003c\/strong\u003e — massive fillet weld volumes on tubular and plate structures welded in flat position.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePressure vessel and heat exchanger shell welds\u003c\/strong\u003e — circumferential seam welds in the flat position on vessel rotating positioners.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBridge fabrication shop welds\u003c\/strong\u003e — high-volume fillet welds on girder flanges and web-to-flange connections in positioner-assisted flat position.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeavy machinery and crane fabrication\u003c\/strong\u003e — fillet welds on structural frames and booms where flat-position fixturing is practical.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProduction shops that use weld positioners\u003c\/strong\u003e — E7028 is most productive when work is rotated to flat or horizontal using jigs and positioners.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Excalibur 7028 — Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Flat\/H Position Technique\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDiameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range (DCEP)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical Deposition Rate\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in (4.8 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e225–310 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e~10 lb\/hr\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7\/32 in (5.6 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e280–375 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e~13 lb\/hr\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/4 in (6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e350–450 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e~16 lb\/hr\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFlat fillet technique:\u003c\/strong\u003e Hold electrode at 45° bisecting angle to the joint, 0–15° drag angle. Use straight travel with no weave — the wide iron-powder arc fills the joint without weaving. Keep arc length short (1× core or less) to maintain maximum deposition and minimum spatter. The self-releasing slag lifts clean on flat surfaces for fast production pace.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHorizontal fillet:\u003c\/strong\u003e Angle slightly toward the vertical plate (50–55° from horizontal) to prevent sagging of the weld metal. Travel speed controls leg size — faster travel for smaller legs, slower for larger.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLow-hydrogen oven protocol:\u003c\/strong\u003e E7028 is a low-hydrogen electrode. Opened containers must be kept in a 250–300 °F holding oven. Do not leave E7028 electrodes on the shop floor or in the electrode holder between passes for extended periods in humid environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling for E7028 Iron-Powder Low-Hydrogen Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE7028 requires the same storage protocol as E7018 low-hydrogen electrodes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed containers:\u003c\/strong\u003e Lincoln's hermetically sealed canisters maintain H4R condition in storage. Use from sealed can within 4–9 hours of opening in ambient conditions per AWS D1.1 Table 4.7 holding limits.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHolding oven required:\u003c\/strong\u003e Once opened, keep E7028 in a 250–300 °F holding oven between uses. This is mandatory for H4R compliance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRe-drying if needed:\u003c\/strong\u003e If exposed to moisture, dry at 700–800 °F for 1 hour (same as E7018 redrying per AWS D1.1). This is a high temperature dry — do not confuse with the 250 °F reconditioning used for non-low-hydrogen rods.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTracking exposure time:\u003c\/strong\u003e For code-required H4R welds, track the cumulative time electrodes have been outside the oven. AWS D1.1 limits exposure time per classification and environment humidity before mandatory redrying.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types for E7028\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE7028 is suitable for mild steel and low-alloy carbon steel:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A36, A572 Grades 42–65\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A516 Grades 55–70 (pressure vessel)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A709 Grade 50 (bridge plate)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAPI 2W Grade 50 offshore plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE7028 is used exclusively for flat and horizontal fillet and lap joints, horizontal groove welds, and flat position butt joints. It is not used for any vertical, overhead, or pipe welding position.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Excalibur 7028 E7028 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Why is E7028 limited to flat and horizontal positions only?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nE7028 uses a very heavy iron-powder flux coating that produces a thick, fluid slag. This slag must freeze flat to prevent rundown. In vertical or overhead positions, the fluid slag would run out of the joint before the weld metal freezes, causing severe defects. E7018, with a thinner iron-powder coating and faster-freezing slag, is the appropriate choice for all-position low-hydrogen welding.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is deposition efficiency and why does it matter?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nDeposition efficiency is the percentage of electrode weight (excluding stub loss) that is deposited as weld metal. E7018 achieves ~115 % (with iron powder adding weight); E7028 achieves ~145 %. On a shop welding 1,000 lb of weld metal per week, E7028 reduces electrode consumption by roughly 20 % compared to E7018 for the same weld volume — significant cost savings in production.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How do I store E7028 to maintain the H4R rating?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nKeep in a 250–300 °F holding oven once the sealed container is opened. Never leave E7028 on the shop floor overnight. AWS D1.1 Table 4.7 permits limited exposure time outside the oven (2–4 hours depending on environment humidity) before mandatory redrying at 700–800 °F for 1 hour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can I use E7028 for structural welding per AWS D1.1?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes. E7028 H4R is listed in AWS D1.1 Table 4.5 as an approved filler for prequalified WPS and meets the Low Hydrogen requirement for Category F and H weld positions. It is fully approved for structural welding in flat and horizontal positions. For all-position structural work, use E7018.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the largest single-pass fillet weld I can make with E7028?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nWith 7\/32 in or 1\/4 in E7028, a single flat pass can make a 3\/8 in to 1\/2 in leg fillet weld. For legs over 1\/2 in, multiple passes are required. E7028's high deposition rate means each pass deposits maximum weld metal per arc-on time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is E7028 better than SAW (submerged arc) for flat fillet welds?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nSAW (submerged arc welding) achieves higher deposition rates (30–60 lb\/hr vs. 10–16 lb\/hr for E7028) but requires fixed setups, flux handling equipment, and is impractical for complex joint configurations. E7028 provides the highest manual SMAW deposition rate without the fixturing requirement of SAW, making it the best choice for shops that can't justify SAW equipment or need flexibility to move the electrode around the joint.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How does E7028 compare to E7018 in the flat position?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nIn flat and horizontal fillet positions, E7028 outperforms E7018 in deposition rate (~145 % vs. ~115 %) and operator-perceived ease — the wide, self-leveling bead requires less operator technique to produce a consistent flat fillet. E7018 is used when you also need vertical and overhead positions; E7028 is strictly more productive in flat\/horizontal production environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Why is E7028 limited to flat and horizontal positions?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"E7028 has a very heavy iron-powder flux that produces a thick, fluid slag that must freeze flat. It cannot be run vertical or overhead without the slag running out of the joint.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is deposition efficiency and why does E7028 matter?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Deposition efficiency is the percentage of electrode weight deposited as weld metal. E7028 achieves ~145% vs ~115% for E7018 — roughly 20% less electrode consumption for the same weld volume in production shops.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I store E7028 to maintain H4R rating?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Keep in a 250-300°F holding oven once the container is opened. AWS D1.1 limits exposure time outside the oven to 2-4 hours depending on humidity before redrying at 700-800°F for 1 hour.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is E7028 approved for AWS D1.1 structural welding?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. E7028 H4R is in AWS D1.1 Table 4.5 as an approved filler for flat and horizontal positions. For all-position structural work, use E7018.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the largest single-pass fillet weld with E7028?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"With 7\/32 or 1\/4 in E7028, a single flat pass can produce a 3\/8 to 1\/2 in leg fillet. Over 1\/2 in requires multiple passes.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How does E7028 compare to E7018 in flat position?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"E7028 has ~145% deposition efficiency vs ~115% for E7018 and produces a wider, more self-leveling bead. E7018 is needed when you also require vertical and overhead capability.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is E7028 better than SAW for flat fillet welds?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"SAW has higher deposition rates (30-60 lb\/hr) but requires fixed setups and flux handling. E7028 at 10-16 lb\/hr is the best manual SMAW option for flat fillet production without SAW equipment.\"}}\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eE7028 High-Deposition Welding Rod — Technical Notes \u0026amp; Productivity Analysis\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E7028 welding rod's high deposition efficiency (approximately 145%) results from the large iron-powder loading in the flux coating — iron powder is melted and deposited as weld metal along with the core wire, dramatically increasing the amount of weld metal deposited per unit of core wire consumed. For structural fabrication shops tracking electrode costs, E7028 provides approximately 25% more weld metal per pound of electrode purchased compared to E7018, and up to 40% more compared to bare E7016 or E7015 electrodes. This cost advantage is most pronounced in high-volume flat and horizontal fillet weld applications — beam-to-column connections, gusset plates, base plate fillet welds, and vessel seam welds where every weld can be made in the flat (1F, 1G) or horizontal fillet (2F) position using positioners or purpose-built fixtures. E7028 is specified in AWS D1.1 Table 4.5 as an approved filler metal for flat and horizontal positions on Group I and II steels. Its H4R hydrogen designation matches the low-hydrogen requirement for high-restraint, thick-section structural joints. When planning production welding operations with E7028, calculate the electrode burn-off rate at the specific amperage and duty cycle to determine electrode quantities for the production run — Lincoln's published technical data provides burn-off rate curves for all available E7028 diameters at certified amperage settings.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"5\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638098493591,"sku":"ED032636","price":338.48,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":47647590711447,"sku":"ED038371","price":0.0,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED032638)","offer_id":43638099181719,"sku":"ED032638","price":359.64,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED034314)","offer_id":43638124806295,"sku":"ED034314","price":424.75,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed032636-excalibur-7028-stick-smaw-welding-rod-532x14-in-50-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594687"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-8018-b2-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 8018-B2 MR E8018-C3 Stick Welding Rod","description":"\u003cp\u003eLincoln Excalibur 8018-B2 MR is a premium low-hydrogen E8018-B2 welding rod engineered for welding 1.25 Cr – 0.5 Mo (P11\/P12) chrome-moly steel in high-temperature power generation, petrochemical, and refinery piping applications. With H4R hydrogen designation and the Lincoln Excalibur moisture-resistant coating, Excalibur 8018-B2 MR provides code-compliant, low-hydrogen weld metal on Cr-Mo piping systems that must operate reliably at elevated temperatures from 850 to 1100 °F. It is the E8018-B2 welding rod specified by power plant and refinery welding engineers who need consistent chrome-moly weld metal with verifiable hydrogen control.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is the Lincoln Excalibur 8018-B2 MR E8018-B2 Welding Rod?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExcalibur 8018-B2 MR is Lincoln Electric's E8018-B2 low-hydrogen SMAW electrode with moisture-resistant (MR) flux coating. The AWS classification E8018-B2 decodes as: \"E\" = electrode; \"80\" = 80,000 psi minimum tensile; \"1\" = all-position; \"8\" = low-hydrogen iron-powder covering, DCEP; \"B2\" = 1.25 % Cr, 0.5 % Mo alloy deposit chemistry. The 1.25 Cr – 0.5 Mo alloy composition matches the P11 (ASME B31.3 Group 1.13) and P12 (ASME B31.3 Group 1.14) chrome-moly pipe specifications widely used in boiler feed water systems, hydrogen service piping, and refinery process lines operating between 850 and 1100 °F. Chromium improves oxidation resistance and creep strength at elevated temperature; molybdenum increases creep rupture strength and contributes to solid-solution strengthening at temperature. Post-weld heat treatment (PWHT) is mandatory for E8018-B2 welds on P11 pipe per ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.3 — PWHT relieves residual stresses and tempers the as-welded martensite in the weld metal and HAZ, restoring ductility and toughness. The MR designation means the flux coating is formulated with moisture-resistant binders that resist atmospheric moisture pickup more aggressively than standard low-hydrogen coatings — providing extended exposure time outside the oven before re-drying is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Mechanical Specs — E8018-B2 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Classification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eE8018-B2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Standard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH-Designation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH4R (≤ 4 mL\/100g diffusible H2)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile Strength (min., PWHT)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80,000 psi (551 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYield Strength (min., PWHT)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e67,000 psi (462 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation (min., PWHT)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChromium Content\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.00–1.50%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMolybdenum Content\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.40–0.65%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow-hydrogen iron-powder, MR\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDCEP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePositions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32, 1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePWHT Required\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes — per applicable code (ASME B31.1, B31.3)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for E8018-B2 Chrome-Moly Welding Rods\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eASME P11 chrome-moly piping (1.25Cr-0.5Mo)\u003c\/strong\u003e — boiler headers, steam superheater piping, boiler feed systems, and turbine steam piping in power generation plants.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eASME P12 piping (1Cr-0.5Mo per some B31 classifications)\u003c\/strong\u003e — compatible in many refinery applications per WPS procedure qualification.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRefinery process piping in hydrogen service\u003c\/strong\u003e — operating at elevated temperatures and partial hydrogen pressures where Nelson curve compliance (API 941) requires 1.25 Cr – 0.5 Mo steel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHigh-temperature petrochemical heat exchangers\u003c\/strong\u003e — shell and tube exchangers in crude oil, heavy vacuum gas oil, and reformate service.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFossil fuel power plant boiler and pressure part fabrication\u003c\/strong\u003e — ASME Section I and B31.1 Code application for steam service to 1100 °F.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRepair welding on in-service P11 piping\u003c\/strong\u003e — on-stream repair and weld repair under applicable fitness-for-service standards.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Excalibur 8018-B2 MR — Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; PWHT\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDiameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage (DCEP)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePosition\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60–85 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoot passes, thin pipe\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80–115 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGeneral fill\/cap passes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–155 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFill passes, horizontal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e145–195 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy fill passes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreheat:\u003c\/strong\u003e Preheat is mandatory for P11 Cr-Mo pipe per ASME B31.1\/B31.3. Minimum preheat 300–400 °F for wall thickness \u0026gt; 0.5 in; check the applicable code and WPS for the exact preheat, interpass, and PWHT requirements for your specific pipe size and wall thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePWHT:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1350–1400 °F (732–760 °C) for 1 hour per inch of wall thickness (1 hour minimum) per ASME B31.1 for P11. PWHT must be performed before hydrostatic testing. Cooling rate controls apply — consult the applicable code for controlled cooling requirements to avoid reheat cracking in heavy-section welds.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHydrogen management:\u003c\/strong\u003e Maintain electrodes in a 250–300 °F holding oven. MR coating provides enhanced resistance but does not eliminate the oven storage requirement for long-duration production work. AWS D1.1 \/ ASME Section IX exposure limits apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling for E8018-B2 MR Low-Hydrogen Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed container:\u003c\/strong\u003e Store in sealed Lincoln container at room temperature. MR packaging provides extended shelf resistance to moisture.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHolding oven (mandatory once opened):\u003c\/strong\u003e 250–300 °F once the container is opened. MR coating extends exposure time before redrying is needed — consult Lincoln's published MR electrode guide for specific exposure time tables.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRedrying if needed:\u003c\/strong\u003e 700–800 °F for 1–2 hours if moisture is suspected.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eContamination risk:\u003c\/strong\u003e Cr-Mo weld metal is particularly sensitive to hydrogen cracking due to higher hardenability. Strictly maintain preheat throughout the weld and eliminate moisture sources near the joint.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types for E8018-B2\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A335 Grade P11 (1.25Cr-0.5Mo) pipe\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A387 Grade 11 Cr-Mo alloy pressure vessel plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A182 Grade F11 forgings\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A234 Grade WP11 pipe fittings\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eJoint types: groove welds on pipe and plate, fillet welds on attachment and support welds, and repair welds on in-service P11 components. All joints require prequalified or procedure-qualified WPS per ASME Section IX or the applicable power\/process piping code.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Excalibur 8018-B2 MR E8018-B2 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What does P11 pipe mean and why does it require special electrodes?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nP11 refers to the ASME material group designation for 1.25 Cr – 0.5 Mo low-alloy chrome-moly steel used in elevated-temperature service (up to 1100 °F). The chromium and molybdenum additions provide oxidation resistance and creep strength at temperature that plain carbon steel lacks. These same alloying elements increase hardenability — the tendency to form hard, brittle martensite in the weld HAZ upon rapid cooling. Special low-hydrogen electrodes (E8018-B2) and mandatory preheat\/PWHT protocols are required to prevent hydrogen cracking in the weld and HAZ.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Why is PWHT mandatory for E8018-B2 welds on P11 pipe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nPWHT at 1350–1400 °F tempers the martensite in the as-welded HAZ, restoring ductility and toughness. Without PWHT, the hardened HAZ is brittle and susceptible to stress-corrosion cracking in hydrogen service and thermal-fatigue cracking during plant startup\/shutdown cycles. ASME B31.1 and B31.3 both mandate PWHT for P11 above certain wall thicknesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the difference between E8018-B2 and E9018-B3?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nE9018-B3 is used for 2.25 Cr – 1 Mo steel (P22 pipe), which requires higher alloy content, higher preheat, and higher PWHT temperature than P11. E8018-B2 is specifically matched to P11 chemistry. Using E9018-B3 on P11 is generally overalloyed and does not violate codes, but E8018-B2 is the specified and qualified filler for most P11 procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What preheat do I need for 1.25 Cr – 0.5 Mo pipe welding?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nASME B31.1 requires 300 °F minimum preheat for P11 material in most thickness ranges. Specific requirements vary by wall thickness and carbon equivalent — always verify against the qualified WPS and applicable code section for the exact preheat, interpass maximum temperature (typically 600 °F maximum), and PWHT requirements for the job.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the MR (moisture-resistant) designation on Excalibur 8018-B2 MR?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nLincoln's MR designation indicates the electrode flux has been formulated with moisture-resistant binders that reduce the rate of moisture pickup from the atmosphere compared to standard low-hydrogen coatings. This provides extended holding time outside the oven before redrying is required — practical for field welding where oven access is intermittent. It does not eliminate the oven requirement; it extends the permitted exposure window.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is E8018-B2 approved for ASME Section IX?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes. E8018-B2 is an F4 group filler metal under ASME Section IX QW-432 and qualifies for procedure tests on P5A\/P5B chrome-moly base metals including P11 and P12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can I use E8018-B2 without PWHT in an emergency repair?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nEmergency weld repairs on P11 without PWHT are governed by fitness-for-service standards (API 579, ASME PCC-2) and require engineering authorization. Butter-bead or temper-bead welding techniques may be used to achieve in-place tempering without furnace PWHT — but these procedures require specific qualification and authorization. Never skip PWHT on production P11 pipe welds without explicit code or engineering authorization.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is P11 pipe and why does it need special electrodes?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"P11 is 1.25Cr-0.5Mo chrome-moly steel for high-temperature service up to 1100°F. The alloy additions increase hardenability, requiring low-hydrogen electrodes (E8018-B2) and mandatory preheat\/PWHT to prevent hydrogen cracking.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Why is PWHT mandatory for E8018-B2 welds on P11?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"PWHT at 1350-1400°F tempers the hard martensitic HAZ, restoring ductility and toughness. Without PWHT, the HAZ is brittle and susceptible to stress-corrosion and thermal-fatigue cracking.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the difference between E8018-B2 and E9018-B3?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"E9018-B3 is for 2.25Cr-1Mo P22 pipe requiring higher alloy content, higher preheat, and higher PWHT temperature. E8018-B2 is matched to P11 chemistry.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What preheat is needed for P11 chrome-moly pipe?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"ASME B31.1 requires 300°F minimum preheat for most P11 wall thicknesses. Always verify against the qualified WPS — interpass max is typically 600°F.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What does the MR designation mean on Excalibur 8018-B2 MR?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"MR (moisture-resistant) means the flux uses moisture-resistant binders that slow atmospheric moisture pickup, extending the permitted exposure time outside the oven for field welding applications.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is E8018-B2 approved for ASME Section IX?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. E8018-B2 is F4 group filler per ASME Section IX QW-432, qualifying for P5A\/P5B chrome-moly base metals including P11 and P12.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I use E8018-B2 without PWHT in emergency repair?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Emergency repairs without PWHT require engineering authorization under API 579 or ASME PCC-2, using temper-bead techniques. Never skip PWHT on production P11 welds without explicit code authorization.\"}}\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003e1.25Cr-0.5Mo Chrome-Moly Welding — Technical Notes for Power Generation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChrome-moly (Cr-Mo) alloy steels are the workhorses of high-temperature power generation systems. The 1.25 Cr – 0.5 Mo composition (ASTM A335 Grade P11, ASTM A387 Grade 11) balances elevated-temperature strength, oxidation resistance, and weldability at a cost point that makes it the dominant specification for steam-temperature service below approximately 1050–1100 °F. Above 1100 °F, 2.25 Cr – 1 Mo (P22) or 9 Cr – 1 Mo (P91) steel is required. The E8018-B2 electrode chemistry mirrors P11 base metal composition in the weld deposit (1.0–1.5% Cr, 0.4–0.65% Mo), ensuring that the welded joint's creep-rupture properties match the parent metal over the component's design life. Lincoln Excalibur 8018-B2 MR is manufactured with premium-grade iron powder and controlled moisture-resistant binder chemistry that maintains the H4R classification (≤ 4 mL\/100g diffusible hydrogen) across field temperature and humidity variations. For power plant pre-heat and PWHT compliance, Lincoln's published Excalibur 8018-B2 MR data sheet provides the specific preheat table (temperature vs. wall thickness), interpass maximum, PWHT temperature range, and cooling rate guidance required by ASME B31.1 Section 131.7 for P11 welds. Consult this data sheet and the applicable piping code for every P11 weld procedure to ensure full code compliance.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 8 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638092529815,"sku":"ED032878","price":190.85,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in · 25 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638094758039,"sku":"ED032881","price":180.54,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638093611159,"sku":"ED032879","price":230.9,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638095741079,"sku":"ED032882","price":345.93,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638095970455,"sku":"ED032883","price":315.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed032878-excalibur-8018-b2-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332x12-in-3-8-lb-easy-open-cans-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594746"},{"product_id":"lincoln-excalibur-9018-b3-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Excalibur 9018-B3 MR E9018-M Stick Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- Stick Lane A | handle: lincoln-excalibur-9018-b3-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod | 2026-06-16 --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eLincoln Excalibur 9018-B3 MR E9018-B3 — Overview\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Excalibur 9018-B3 MR\u003c\/strong\u003e is a low-alloy, low-hydrogen SMAW electrode classified to \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E9018-B3\u003c\/strong\u003e, designed for welding 2¼Cr-1Mo (P22) creep-resistant alloy steel in high-temperature pressure vessel, refinery, and power generation applications. The B3 chemistry deposit contains nominally 2.25% chromium and 1% molybdenum to match the creep strength and thermal fatigue resistance of the base metal. The \u003cstrong\u003eMR\u003c\/strong\u003e designation (Moisture Resistant) indicates a hermetically sealed package that maintains the low-hydrogen condition of the coating during storage — critical for avoiding hydrogen-induced cracking in high-strength alloy steels. \u003cstrong\u003eDC+ (DCEP) only; all positions.\u003c\/strong\u003e Available through WeldingMart as an authorized Lincoln Electric distributor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-specs\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M E9018-B3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAlloy chemistry (deposit)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.25% Cr, 1.0% Mo (nominal)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCoating type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow-hydrogen, iron-powder basic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ (DCEP) only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions: 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90,000 psi (620 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum yield strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e78,000 psi (538 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElongation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e14% minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMoisture Resistant (MR)\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes — hermetically sealed packaging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in: 90–140 A | 5\/32 in: 120–175 A | 3\/16 in: 150–220 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLincoln Electric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.5\/A5.5M; ASME Section IX P-No. 5A; ASME B31.3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-applications\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eApplications \u0026amp; Industries\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eExcalibur 9018-B3 MR is specified for elevated-temperature and high-pressure alloy steel service:\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePetroleum refinery piping:\u003c\/strong\u003e Hydrocracker, hydrotreater, and reformer unit piping fabricated from 2¼Cr-1Mo (P22\/Grade 22) alloy steel per ASME B31.3\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePower generation:\u003c\/strong\u003e High-pressure steam piping, boiler headers, and superheater elements in fossil-fuel power plants where creep resistance at elevated service temperatures is essential\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePressure vessel fabrication:\u003c\/strong\u003e ASME Section VIII vessels in 2¼Cr-1Mo service, including reactor vessels for hydroprocessing units\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNuclear applications:\u003c\/strong\u003e P-No. 5A components under ASME Section III where the 2¼Cr-1Mo alloy system is required\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDissimilar metal welds:\u003c\/strong\u003e Joining 2¼Cr-1Mo to carbon steel or stainless steel components in refinery and power plant construction\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technique\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eProcess Technology — How to Run E9018-B3\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePreheat:\u003c\/strong\u003e Mandatory — 400–600°F (205–315°C) preheat required for P22\/Grade 22 alloy steel. Follow ASME B31.3 or applicable code for specific preheat and minimum interpass temperature.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInterpass temperature:\u003c\/strong\u003e Maintain between preheat minimum and 600°F (315°C) maximum. Allow the joint to cool to this range between passes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePost-Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT):\u003c\/strong\u003e Required for P22 materials under ASME B31.3 and Section VIII — typically 1325–1375°F (718–746°C) for a minimum of 1 hour per inch of thickness. Confirm PWHT requirements in your WPS.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTechnique:\u003c\/strong\u003e Short arc, stringer or narrow weave beads. Limit weaving to 3× rod diameter maximum to control heat input and maintain mechanical properties.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLow-hydrogen practice:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use electrodes directly from sealed MR packaging or from a holding oven. Maintain in heated quiver at 250–300°F between passes in the field.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eArc restart:\u003c\/strong\u003e Re-strike at the leading edge of the previous bead crater; chip and wire brush slag between every pass.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-storage\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling — Low-Hydrogen Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE9018-B3 MR is a \u003cstrong\u003elow-hydrogen electrode requiring strict moisture control\u003c\/strong\u003e to prevent hydrogen-induced cold cracking (HICC) in high-strength alloy steel:\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUnopened MR cans:\u003c\/strong\u003e Store in a dry location between 40–120°F (4–49°C). Hermetically sealed MR cans maintain the H4 or H8 diffusible hydrogen level without a holding oven.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAfter opening:\u003c\/strong\u003e Transfer to a holding oven at 250–300°F (121–149°C) immediately. Electrodes must be used within 4 hours of removal from a heated quiver; after 4 hours out, return to the oven for 1 hour minimum at 500–700°F (260–371°C) to recondition.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReconditioning:\u003c\/strong\u003e Per AWS A5.5, E8018\/E9018 electrodes can be reconditioned at 700–800°F (371–427°C) for 1 hour. Do not recondition more than once.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eField storage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use a heated electrode quiver or pouch on the job. Keep rods dry between heats. Never leave low-hydrogen rods in open air overnight.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-faq\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cdl\u003e\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat does E9018-B3 mean?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eIn the AWS A5.5 designation system: E = electrode, 90 = 90 ksi minimum tensile strength, 1 = all-position, 8 = low-hydrogen coating with iron powder, B3 = chromium-molybdenum alloy deposit (2.25Cr-1Mo). The B-series designators (B1, B2, B3) indicate increasing Cr-Mo content for progressive creep resistance requirements.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat base metal does E9018-B3 weld?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eE9018-B3 is designed to weld 2¼Cr-1Mo alloy steel (ASTM A335 Grade P22, A182 Grade F22, ASME P-No. 5A) — the alloy steel specified for high-temperature refinery, power generation, and pressure vessel service where long-term creep strength above 950°F is required.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eIs PWHT required when using E9018-B3?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eYes, in virtually all code-governed applications. ASME B31.3 and Section VIII require post-weld heat treatment for 2¼Cr-1Mo (P-No. 5A) materials to relieve residual stresses, temper the HAZ, and achieve the required creep properties. Typical PWHT: 1325–1375°F for 1 hour per inch of thickness minimum. Follow your qualified WPS.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat does the MR designation mean on Lincoln Excalibur electrodes?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eMR (Moisture Resistant) indicates that the electrode is packaged in a hermetically sealed container that protects the low-hydrogen coating from atmospheric moisture during storage. MR-packaged electrodes maintain their hydrogen level (H4 or H8) until the can is opened, eliminating the need for oven storage of unopened stock.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eHow should I store E9018-B3 after opening the can?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eAfter breaking the hermetic seal, transfer immediately to a holding oven at 250–300°F (121–149°C). Electrodes left at ambient conditions begin absorbing moisture within hours. Remove only the rods needed for immediate use and keep the remainder in the oven. Use within 4 hours of removal or recondition per AWS A5.5 procedures.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n  \u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-crosslinks\"\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse all low-alloy electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — or see the \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-excalibur-10018-d2-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eLincoln Excalibur 10018-D2 MR\u003c\/a\u003e for higher-strength Mn-Mo low-alloy applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What does E9018-B3 mean?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"In the AWS A5.5 designation: E = electrode, 90 = 90 ksi minimum tensile, 1 = all-position, 8 = low-hydrogen iron-powder coating, B3 = 2.25Cr-1Mo alloy deposit for creep-resistant service.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What base metal does E9018-B3 weld?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"E9018-B3 welds 2¼Cr-1Mo alloy steel (ASTM A335 Grade P22, ASME P-No. 5A) for high-temperature refinery, power generation, and pressure vessel service.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is PWHT required when using E9018-B3?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Yes. ASME B31.3 and Section VIII require post-weld heat treatment for 2¼Cr-1Mo (P-No. 5A) materials. Typical PWHT: 1325–1375°F for 1 hour per inch of thickness minimum. Follow your qualified WPS.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"How should I store E9018-B3 after opening the can?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"After opening the hermetic MR can, transfer immediately to a holding oven at 250–300°F (121–149°C). Use within 4 hours of removal or recondition at 700–800°F for 1 hour per AWS A5.5.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 8 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638096494743,"sku":"ED032884","price":203.72,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in · 25 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638098264215,"sku":"ED032887","price":194.32,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638097903767,"sku":"ED032885","price":220.68,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638098952343,"sku":"ED032888","price":363.07,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638099378327,"sku":"ED032889","price":358.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed032884-excalibur-9018-b3-mr-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-12-in-3-8-lb-easy-open-cans-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594688"},{"product_id":"lincoln-ferroweld-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Ferroweld Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-ferroweld-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Ferroweld\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.15 ENiFe-CI SMAW stick electrode family with 60-70 ksi typical tensile and DC- or AC, all positions operation. WeldingMart stocks 2 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Ferroweld\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eENiFe-CI is an AWS A5.15 nickel-iron SMAW electrode (~55% Ni \/ Fe balance) for welding gray, ductile, and malleable cast iron, especially on heavier sections and ductile iron where higher weld-metal strength is needed. The Fe-balanced chemistry reduces cost vs pure-nickel ENi-CI while maintaining machinability and crack resistance. Runs DC- or AC in all positions; low amperage, short stringer beads, and peening are standard practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.15 ENiFe-CI\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60-70 ksi typical\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC- or AC, all positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Ferroweld from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"1\/8 in · 1 lb Tube (6-Pack)","offer_id":43638080503959,"sku":"ED031542","price":51.34,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638123167895,"sku":"ED033882","price":201.85,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed031542-ferroweld-stick-smaw-welding-rod-18x14-in-6-1-lb-tubes-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594867"},{"product_id":"lincoln-fleetweld-180-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Fleetweld 180 E6010 Stick Welding Rod","description":"\u003cp\u003eLincoln Fleetweld 180 is a deep-penetrating E6010 welding rod built for pipeline root passes, structural groove welds, and any application demanding maximum arc force on DC+ polarity. The cellulosic sodium flux produces a fast-freeze, digging arc that cuts through mill scale, light rust, and surface moisture — making the E6010 welding rod the standard choice for cross-country pipelines, field maintenance, construction site structural welding, and shipbuilding root passes. With 67,000 psi minimum tensile strength and 22 % elongation, Fleetweld 180 provides both strength and ductility in a single pass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is the Lincoln Fleetweld 180 E6010 Welding Rod?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFleetweld 180 is Lincoln Electric's standard E6010 cellulosic-sodium SMAW electrode. AWS classification E6010: \"E\" = electrode; \"60\" = 67,000 psi minimum tensile; \"1\" = all-position; \"0\" = high-cellulose sodium flux, DCEP-only. The sodium-based cellulosic covering generates a hydrogen-rich reducing gas shield when the flux combusts, creating the characteristic forceful, penetrating arc. The fast-freeze, high-slag-fluidity behavior allows welding in all positions including vertical-up and overhead without slag running ahead of the arc. This is the defining property of E6010 welding rods: you can weld out-of-position on contaminated or gapped base metal that would defeat titania or low-hydrogen rods. Fleetweld 180 is the general-use E6010 in Lincoln's lineup, distinct from the pipeline-optimized Pipeliner 6P+ and 5P+ which have extra qualification for pipe codes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Specs — E6010 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Classification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eE6010\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e67,000 psi (462 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYield Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55,000 psi (379 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-cellulose sodium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDCEP only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePosition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll (F, H, V-up, OH)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32, 1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCritical note: E6010 is DCEP-only. AC cannot stabilize the sodium-based arc — use E6011 (potassium-stabilized) if AC is your only option. The hydrogen generated by the cellulosic flux is high — this is fundamental to the E6010 mechanism and cannot be eliminated. Use appropriate preheat on thick or high-carbon steels to prevent hydrogen-induced cracking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for Fleetweld 180 E6010 Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePipeline root passes\u003c\/strong\u003e — the gold standard for 5G and 6G pipe root passes in natural gas, oil, and water pipeline construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStructural groove welds requiring maximum penetration\u003c\/strong\u003e — full-penetration butt welds on bridges, buildings, and heavy equipment where lack-of-fusion cannot be tolerated.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eField and maintenance welding on rusted, scaled, or coated base metal\u003c\/strong\u003e — the forceful arc self-cleans contaminated surfaces better than any other AWS carbon-steel classification.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOverhead and out-of-position welding\u003c\/strong\u003e — fast-freeze slag holds the puddle in position even in the overhead pass.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eShipbuilding root passes\u003c\/strong\u003e — hull and bulkhead groove joints where full penetration is required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePressure vessel and boiler root passes\u003c\/strong\u003e — where ASME Section IX permits E6010 and a penetrating root pass is needed before fill and cap with low-hydrogen filler.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Fleetweld 180 — Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDiameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDCEP Amperage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eApplication\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60–90 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoot passes on thin pipe, sheet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGeneral root passes, structural\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–165 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFill passes, heavy fillet welds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in (4.8 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150–210 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy fill passes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity:\u003c\/strong\u003e DCEP (DC positive, electrode positive) only. Never run E6010 on AC or DCEN — the sodium-stabilized arc will be erratic or refuse to start.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRoot pass technique:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use the keyhole method: travel at a speed that maintains a visible keyhole (molten opening that just clears the far side of the root face). If the keyhole closes, slow down. If it opens too wide, speed up or increase arc length slightly. Arc length should be 1× to 1.5× core diameter — slightly longer than E7018 for better puddle visibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhip technique for fill\/cap passes:\u003c\/strong\u003e For vertical-up fill or cap passes, use a J-weave or whip to let the shelf freeze between advances. Keep the arc length consistent to prevent undercut.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling for E6010 Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE6010 requires controlled moisture content — NOT over-dried:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNever over-dry:\u003c\/strong\u003e Do NOT bake E6010 at the 250–300 °F cycles used for E7018. Over-drying destroys the cellulosic flux mechanism and makes the electrode functionally useless.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStore in sealed original containers\u003c\/strong\u003e in a dry area at 40–120 °F. Lincoln's sealed canisters maintain the correct moisture balance for years of shelf storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIf wetted:\u003c\/strong\u003e Discard heavily wetted electrodes — moisture restoration is impractical in the field.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHandle with care:\u003c\/strong\u003e The cellulosic coating is relatively brittle; dropped or bent electrodes often crack the flux, causing arc instability and penetration loss.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types for E6010\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFleetweld 180 E6010 is designed for mild steel, carbon-manganese steel, and low-alloy steel:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A36, A572 Grades 42 and 50\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAPI 5L Grade B, X42, X52 (with appropriate preheat for higher grades)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A516 pressure vessel plate\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSAE 1018, 1020 carbon steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot for stainless, cast iron, or aluminum. Best joint types are open-root groove joints (pipe and plate), T-joint fillet welds in all positions, and lap joints. For pipe welding beyond Grade X52, consult Lincoln's pipeline electrode guide for Pipeliner series electrodes with specific API qualification test data.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Fleetweld 180 E6010 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Why is E6010 DCEP-only and won't run on AC?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe sodium-based cellulosic flux cannot ionize quickly enough to re-strike the arc on each AC polarity reversal. Potassium (used in E6011) ionizes more easily and stabilizes AC arc. For AC power, use Lincoln Fleetweld 35 (E6011) instead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the keyhole technique for E6010 root passes?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nThe keyhole technique involves maintaining a small molten opening (keyhole) visible through the root gap as you travel. The keyhole confirms full penetration to the far side of the joint. Maintain it at roughly the size of the electrode core. If it disappears, slow down or reduce arc length. If it grows too large, speed up or increase voltage slightly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can I use E6010 as a fill and cap electrode?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes, though E6010 is most commonly used for root and hot passes. For fill and cap passes, most procedures switch to E7018 for lower hydrogen, better bead profile, and easier slag control. However, E6010 fill and cap is used in pipeline procedures where the entire weld is completed with cellulosic electrodes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Why should I not dry E6010 in a rod oven?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nE6010 cellulosic flux contains organic binders that produce the gas shield. Oven drying at E7018 temperatures decomposes those binders and eliminates the mechanism that creates the fast-freeze arc. An over-dried E6010 will sputter, produce erratic penetration, and may not restart cleanly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What amperage for a 1\/8 in root pass on 6 in schedule 40 pipe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nTypical starting range: 80–100 A DCEP for a 6 in Sch 40 pipe root with a 1\/8 in E6010. Many pipeline welders start at 90 A and fine-tune based on how the keyhole behaves. Machine output at the arc end (accounting for cable drop) should be 75–95 A.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How does Fleetweld 180 compare to Pipeliner 6P+?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nBoth are E6010 cellulosic sodium electrodes. Pipeliner 6P+ is specifically designed and tested for API 1104 pipeline procedures and meets additional qualification requirements for cross-country pipeline welding — it has tighter chemistry controls for the pipeline code. Fleetweld 180 is the general-purpose E6010 suitable for structural, maintenance, and general fabrication work. For pipeline work governed by API 1104, specify Pipeliner 6P+; for everything else, Fleetweld 180 is the practical choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Does E6010 meet ASME Section IX requirements?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes, E6010 is listed as an F3 group filler metal under ASME Section IX QW-432 and is approved for carbon steel weld procedures under P1 base metals. Confirm your specific WPS qualification for the exact base metal, thickness, and position combination.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Why is E6010 DCEP-only and won't run on AC?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Sodium-based cellulosic flux cannot re-ionize fast enough for AC polarity reversals. E6011 uses potassium flux that stabilizes on AC. Use E6011 when only AC power is available.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the keyhole technique for E6010 root passes?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Maintain a small molten opening (keyhole) ahead of the puddle at root gap. It confirms full penetration. Slow down if it closes, speed up or increase arc length if it grows too large.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I use E6010 as fill and cap electrode?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes, though most procedures switch to E7018 for fill and cap. Full-cellulosic pipeline procedures do use E6010 throughout.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Why should I not dry E6010 in a rod oven?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Oven drying at E7018 temperatures destroys the organic binders in the cellulosic flux, eliminating the fast-freeze arc mechanism and making the electrode unusable.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What amperage for 1\/8 in E6010 root pass on 6 in Sch 40 pipe?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Typical 80-100A DCEP for a 6 in Sch 40 root pass with 1\/8 in E6010. Start at 90A and tune based on keyhole behavior.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How does Fleetweld 180 compare to Pipeliner 6P+?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Both are E6010 cellulosic rods. Pipeliner 6P+ has API 1104 qualification for pipeline work. Fleetweld 180 is the general-purpose version for structural, maintenance, and fabrication.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does E6010 meet ASME Section IX?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. E6010 is F3 group filler under ASME Section IX QW-432 and is approved for P1 carbon steel procedures.\"}}\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eE6010 Welding Rod Fundamentals \u0026amp; Technical Selection Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E6010 welding rod is the foundation of structural pipeline and pressure vessel root-pass welding. Its unique combination of deep penetration, fast-freeze slag, and all-position capability makes it the only practical choice for open-root groove welds in fixed-position pipe where the welder cannot rotate the joint. The E6010 root pass procedure is a fundamental skill set for any structural or pipeline welder — the keyhole technique, puddle control, and 6-o'clock technique are hallmarks of qualified SMAW welders. Lincoln Fleetweld 180 is the general-purpose E6010 for applications outside of cross-country pipeline work. For pipeline API 1104 procedures, specify Lincoln Pipeliner 5P+ or 6P+. For structural work, pressure vessel root passes, and general maintenance where DCEP is available, Fleetweld 180 is the practical, cost-effective E6010 choice. E6010 is listed in AWS D1.1 Annex I as a prequalified electrode for Group I and II structural steels. Under ASME Section IX, E6010 qualifies as F3 group filler metal for carbon steel P1 base materials. AWS A5.1 specifies the complete mechanical property and chemical composition requirements for all E6010 production lots — Lincoln's quality assurance program ensures every Fleetweld 180 lot is tested to these requirements before shipment.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 1 lb Tube (6-Pack)","offer_id":43638117007511,"sku":"ED033494","price":58.68,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in · 5 lb Tube (4-Pack)","offer_id":43638118252695,"sku":"ED033496","price":102.76,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638050226327,"sku":"ED010110","price":418.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 1 lb Tube (6-Pack)","offer_id":43638117138583,"sku":"ED033495","price":55.58,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 5 lb Tube (4-Pack)","offer_id":43638118809751,"sku":"ED033497","price":99.19,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638049931415,"sku":"ED010105","price":375.75,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 5 lb Tube","offer_id":43638118973591,"sku":"ED033498","price":111.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638051897495,"sku":"ED010114","price":278.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed033494-fleetweld-180-rsp-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-12-in-6-1-lb-tubes-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594448"},{"product_id":"lincoln-fleetweld-22-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Fleetweld 22 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle lincoln-fleetweld-22-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Fleetweld 22\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.1\/A5.1M E6022 SMAW stick electrode family with 60 ksi minimum (longitudinal weld only) tensile and AC, DC+ or DC-, flat single-pass only operation. WeldingMart stocks 2 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Lincoln Fleetweld 22\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE6022 is an AWS A5.1 high-iron-powder rutile-coated SMAW electrode with 60 ksi minimum tensile, classified for single-pass flat-position welding only. The thick iron-powder coating delivers very high deposition speed for production sheet-metal and light-plate fabrication where mechanical properties of multi-pass welds are not required. Runs on AC, DC+, or DC-; limited to flat-position single-pass work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E6022\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 ksi minimum (longitudinal weld only)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC, DC+ or DC-, flat single-pass only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Lincoln Fleetweld 22 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"1\/8 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638059335831,"sku":"ED021896","price":282.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638058680471,"sku":"ED021895","price":297.26,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed021896-fleetweld-22-stick-smaw-welding-rod-18x14-in-50-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765595105"},{"product_id":"lincoln-fleetweld-35-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Fleetweld 35 E6011 Stick Welding Rod","description":"\u003cp\u003eLincoln Fleetweld 35 is Lincoln Electric's E6011 stick welding rod — a high-cellulose potassium electrode that provides the deep penetrating arc of an E6010 with the bonus of reliable AC compatibility. Rated at 67,000 psi minimum tensile strength, the E6011 welding rod is the go-to choice for AC machine operators who need to weld through rust, mill scale, or moisture-contaminated base metal in maintenance, pipeline repair, construction, and general fabrication. Fleetweld 35 strikes easily, burns aggressively, and self-cleans weld-metal surfaces — qualities that make it indispensable on job sites where surface prep is limited.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is the Lincoln Fleetweld 35 E6011 Stick Welding Rod?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFleetweld 35 is Lincoln's standard E6011 cellulosic potassium SMAW electrode. The AWS designation E6011 decodes as: \"E\" = electrode; \"60\" = 62,000 psi typical \/ 67,000 psi minimum tensile; \"1\" = all-position; \"1\" = high-cellulose potassium flux enabling AC and DC operation. The distinction between E6011 and E6010 is the flux chemistry: E6010 uses sodium-based cellulosic flux and is DC-only; E6011 substitutes potassium for sodium, which stabilizes the arc on alternating current. Both produce the characteristic digging, fast-freeze arc that allows welding out-of-position on contaminated or wet base metal. Lincoln's Fleetweld 35 is the E6011 counterpart to the widely used Fleetweld 180 (E6010) and Pipeliner 6P+ (E6010) in Lincoln's lineup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cellulosic flux covering generates significant hydrogen during welding — E6011 is not low-hydrogen. This is inherent to the fast-freeze, penetrating arc mechanism. On most carbon steel base metals under 1 in thick without high restraint, hydrogen cracking risk is manageable. On high-carbon, high-alloy, or thick-restrained joints, preheat and a switch to low-hydrogen electrodes is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Specs — E6011 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Classification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eE6011\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e67,000 psi (462 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYield Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55,000 psi (379 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-cellulose potassium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC, DCEP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePosition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll (F, H, V-up, OH)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable Diameters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32, 1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe 22 % elongation minimum of E6011 (vs. 17 % for E6013 and E7014) confirms higher weld metal ductility, making it suitable for dynamic-loaded structures where fillet welds may experience bending stresses. E6011 is NOT low-hydrogen — do not use on quenched-and-tempered steels or thick high-carbon joints without applying appropriate preheat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for E6011 Stick Welding Rods\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eField and maintenance welding on rusted, scaly, or coated base metal\u003c\/strong\u003e — the cellulosic arc burns through light rust, mill scale, and paint better than E7018 or E6013.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePipeline and cross-country pipe welding (AC machines)\u003c\/strong\u003e — where E6010 is preferred but only AC power is available, E6011 provides a nearly identical penetrating arc on AC.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAll-position structural fillet and groove welds\u003c\/strong\u003e — overhead, vertical-up, and out-of-position work on construction sites.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eShipbuilding and repair\u003c\/strong\u003e — hull plates and structural members that may have moisture or coating contamination.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRoot pass welding on pipe and plate groove joints\u003c\/strong\u003e — in situations where E6010 is preferred but AC-only power is available.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral structural welding per AWS D1.1\u003c\/strong\u003e — E6011 appears in Table 4.5 as a prequalified filler metal for Group I and II base metals.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Fleetweld 35 — Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAC Amperage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDCEP Amperage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e65–100 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60–90 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90–140 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–165 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in (4.8 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e155–225 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150–210 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity:\u003c\/strong\u003e AC or DCEP (DC+). DCEP produces slightly better penetration and a quieter arc than AC. DCEN is generally not used with E6011 — the arc tends to be unstable and produces a rough bead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTechnique — Root passes:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use a tight arc length (1\/2 to 1× core diameter). For root passes on pipe, use a keyhole technique: advance slowly enough to see a small keyhole ahead of the puddle, then fill it as you travel. A slight whipping motion (forward-hold-back) helps freeze the puddle between advances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVertical-up:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use the J-weave or whip technique; reduce amperage 10–15 A below midrange. E6011's fast-freeze slag supports the puddle in position better than E7014 or E6013.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOverhead:\u003c\/strong\u003e Keep the arc very short and amperage at the low end. The fast-freeze characteristic makes E6011 more manageable overhead than slow-freeze (titania) rods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling for E6011 Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE6011 is a cellulosic electrode. Unlike low-hydrogen rods (E7018), cellulosic rods actually require some moisture in the flux to function correctly — the moisture combusts to produce a shielding hydrogen-CO2 gas envelope. Do NOT over-dry E6011:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStorage temperature:\u003c\/strong\u003e 40–120 °F (4–49 °C) in a dry area. A standard sealed Lincoln container maintains the correct moisture level indefinitely under normal conditions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDo NOT bake at high heat:\u003c\/strong\u003e Never subject E6011 to the 250–300 °F drying cycles used for E7018. Over-drying a cellulosic electrode desiccates the flux and ruins arc performance — the electrode will produce a rough, sputtering arc and poor penetration.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIf wet:\u003c\/strong\u003e If electrodes have been heavily wetted (soaked or submerged), they should be discarded — restoring correct moisture balance is not practical in the field.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHandle gently:\u003c\/strong\u003e Cellulosic flux coatings are more brittle than iron-powder coatings. Avoid dropping container or allowing electrodes to bend. Cracked or chipped flux degrades penetration and arc stability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types — E6011 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFleetweld 35 is designed for mild and low-alloy carbon steel in the following grades:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A36, A572 Grades 42 and 50\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eAPI 5L Grade B, X42, X52 (with appropriate preheat for higher grades)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A516 Grades 60 and 70 (pressure vessel plate)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSAE 1018, 1020 carbon steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE6011 is not recommended for stainless, cast iron, or high-alloy steels without consulting a filler metal specialist. Joint types: all groove and fillet geometries in all positions. Particularly well-suited for single-V and double-V groove joints where full penetration is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreheat:\u003c\/strong\u003e For A36 up to 1 in thick at ambient above 32 °F, preheat is typically not required per AWS D1.1. For higher CE steels or thicker sections, consult the applicable code. Because E6011 produces high hydrogen, use conservative preheat when welding A572 Grade 65 or A588 above 3\/4 in thick.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Fleetweld 35 E6011 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the difference between E6011 and E6010?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nE6010 uses a high-cellulose sodium flux and is DC-only (DCEP). E6011 uses a high-cellulose potassium flux that stabilizes the arc on AC current. Both produce similar deep-penetrating arcs and fast-freeze slag. If you have a DC-only inverter, use E6010. If you only have an AC buzz-box or need AC compatibility, E6011 is the correct choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can I use E6011 for pipe root passes?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes. E6011 is acceptable for root passes on pipe in applications where E6010 is normally preferred but only AC power is available. Use a tight arc length and keyhole technique for full-penetration root pass control. Consult the applicable welding procedure specification (WPS) — some pipe codes require E6010 specifically.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Why should I NOT over-dry E6011?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nCellulosic electrodes like E6011 require residual moisture in the flux to generate the H2-CO2 shielding gas envelope that creates the penetrating arc and fast-freeze behavior. Over-drying at E7018 temperatures (250–300 °F) desiccates the flux, destroys arc performance, and makes the electrode functionally unusable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is E6011 approved for AWS D1.1 structural welding?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes. E6011 is listed in AWS D1.1 Table 4.5 as an approved electrode for prequalified WPS on Group I and II base metals. It is not approved for Demand Critical applications or where CVN toughness classification is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How does Fleetweld 35 compare to Fleetweld 180 E6010?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nBoth are cellulosic electrodes with similar deep-penetrating arc characteristics. Fleetweld 180 (E6010) is DCEP-only and produces a slightly crisper arc with less spatter on DC power. Fleetweld 35 (E6011) adds AC compatibility at a small cost to arc crispness. If you only have DC, use E6010; for AC machines, Fleetweld 35 is the equivalent alternative.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What polarity runs best for E6011 — AC or DCEP?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nDCEP (DC+) gives a slightly smoother, more penetrating arc than AC. AC is acceptable and widely used in field environments. DCEN (DC-) is not recommended for E6011 — the arc tends to be unstable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the maximum plate thickness for E6011 without preheat?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nFor ASTM A36 welded per AWS D1.1, no preheat is required for material up to 1 in thick when ambient temperature is above 32 °F. For higher-alloy or thicker sections, consult the code for minimum preheat requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the difference between E6011 and E6010?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"E6010 uses cellulosic sodium flux and is DCEP-only. E6011 uses cellulosic potassium flux that stabilizes the arc on AC. Both produce deep-penetrating, fast-freeze arcs. Use E6011 when AC-only power is available.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I use E6011 for pipe root passes?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. E6011 is acceptable for root passes on pipe where AC-only power is available. Use a tight arc and keyhole technique. Verify the WPS — some pipe codes require E6010 specifically.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Why should I not over-dry E6011?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Cellulosic electrodes need residual moisture to generate the H2-CO2 shielding envelope. Over-drying at 250-300°F desiccates the flux and ruins arc performance.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is E6011 approved for AWS D1.1?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. E6011 is listed in AWS D1.1 Table 4.5 for prequalified WPS on Group I and II base metals.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How does Fleetweld 35 compare to Fleetweld 180 E6010?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Both are cellulosic electrodes with similar arc characteristics. Fleetweld 180 (E6010) is DCEP-only with a slightly crisper arc. Fleetweld 35 (E6011) adds AC compatibility. Use E6010 on DC machines; E6011 on AC machines.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What polarity is best for E6011?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"DCEP gives a slightly smoother arc than AC. AC is acceptable. DCEN is not recommended — it produces an unstable arc with E6011.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Max plate thickness for E6011 without preheat?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Per AWS D1.1, no preheat required on A36 up to 1 in thick at ambient above 32°F. Use preheat for higher-alloy or thicker sections per the applicable code.\"}}\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eE6011 Stick Welding Rod Selection \u0026amp; Technical Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E6011 stick welding rod is the AC-capable equivalent of the E6010, sharing the deep-penetrating cellulosic arc mechanism with the added benefit of AC arc stability through potassium flux stabilizers. When choosing an E6011 welding rod for maintenance, pipeline, or field fabrication work, the critical selection criteria are: (1) AC machine compatibility — all E6011 rods run on AC but flux quality varies; lower-quality E6011 formulations can still be erratic on older buzz-boxes; Lincoln Fleetweld 35 uses a premium potassium-enhanced covering optimized for 60 Hz AC; (2) Flux coating integrity — the cellulosic coating should have no cracks or chips; (3) Storage condition — never oven-dried; stored sealed in a cool, dry location. E6011 is frequently specified in AWS D1.1 prequalified WPS for group I and II base metals in field and maintenance welding applications where rust, scale, and moisture contamination are present. It is also used in pressure vessel fabrication (ASME Section VIII) for root passes on carbon steel where the full-penetration root must be made without ceramic backing. The 22% elongation of E6011 weld metal is among the highest for any carbon-steel electrode, contributing to the crack-resistant weld deposits needed for dynamically loaded structures in field conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638074409111,"sku":"ED028152","price":305.21,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638076145815,"sku":"ED028153","price":287.63,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638077587607,"sku":"ED028154","price":291.71,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638077915287,"sku":"ED028155","price":320.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/4 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638078537879,"sku":"ED028157","price":312.3,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed028152-fleetweld-35-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332x14-in-50-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594927"},{"product_id":"lincoln-fleetweld-37-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Fleetweld 37 E6013 Stick Welding Rod","description":"\u003cp\u003eLincoln Fleetweld 37 is a soft-arc, titania-coated E6013 stick welding rod engineered for easy arc starts, smooth weld pool control, and self-releasing slag on mild steel. With a 67,000 psi minimum tensile strength and compatibility with AC, DCEP, and DCEN, the E6013 welding rod is the electrode of choice for light fabrication, body panel work, thin plate joining, and welding instruction — any application where ease of use and attractive bead appearance matter more than maximum penetration or hydrogen control. Lincoln Fleetweld 37 runs on AC buzz-boxes, portable inverters, and engine-driven machines with equal ease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is the Lincoln Fleetweld 37 E6013 Stick Welding Rod?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFleetweld 37 is Lincoln Electric's standard E6013 mild-steel stick electrode. The AWS designation E6013 means: \"E\" = electrode; \"60\" = 62,000 psi typical tensile (67,000 psi minimum, AWS specifies 62 ksi); \"1\" = all-position; \"3\" = high-titania sodium or potassium flux covering with AC\/DC compatibility. The titania flux produces a smooth, fluid weld pool with a fast-freezing, self-lifting slag that peels off without aggressive chipping. This makes the E6013 stick welding rod one of the gentlest-running SMAW electrodes in any shop, preferred by welding instructors for first lessons and by sheet metal fabricators for thin-gauge work where burn-through risk is significant. The Fleetweld 37 name positions it firmly in Lincoln's high-volume Fleetweld family alongside Fleetweld 47 (E7014), Fleetweld 35 (E6011), and Fleetweld 180 (E6010).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E6013 classification does not include iron powder in the covering, so deposition efficiency is lower than E7014 or E7018. The trade-off is a very soft arc, minimal spatter, and a forgiving puddle that stays controllable even for operators with less technique refinement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Mechanical Specifications — E6013 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Classification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eE6013\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e67,000 psi (462 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYield Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55,000 psi (379 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-titania potassium \/ sodium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC, DCEP, DCEN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePosition\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll (F, H, V-up, OH)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameters Available\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32, 1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH-Designation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNone (non-low-hydrogen)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE6013 is not listed as a low-hydrogen electrode and is not typically permitted on applications requiring CVN notch-toughness impact testing. Its 17 % elongation minimum confirms good ductility in the weld metal, suitable for most mild-steel fabrication codes. Always verify applicable code requirements before specifying Fleetweld 37 on structural or pressure-containing joints.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for E6013 Stick Welding Rods\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFleetweld 37's soft-arc character and all-position, AC-capable design make it the best E6013 welding rod option for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWelding instruction and training programs\u003c\/strong\u003e — the forgiving arc and self-peeling slag are ideal for students learning SMAW fundamentals on flat and horizontal positions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLight fabrication on thin plate (16 gauge to 3\/8 in)\u003c\/strong\u003e — lower penetration reduces burn-through on thinner base metal compared to E6010 or E7018.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSheet metal fabrication\u003c\/strong\u003e — automotive body panels, light enclosures, signs, ductwork joints, and similar thin-gauge applications.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHobbyist and DIY welding\u003c\/strong\u003e — Fleetweld 37 runs on low-cost AC buzz-boxes and small inverters, making it the go-to E6013 stick welding rod for home shops.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance welding on lightly loaded carbon steel\u003c\/strong\u003e — repair of farm equipment, trailers, racks, and steel furniture where hydrogen control is not required by code.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAC-only job sites\u003c\/strong\u003e — reliable arc starts and smooth operation on 60 Hz transformer machines.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot recommended for: thick section (over 3\/4 in), high-restraint welds, pressure vessels requiring ASME hydrogen control, pipe root passes, or applications demanding Charpy CVN certification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Fleetweld 37 — Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDiameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNotes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60–90 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSheet metal, thin plate, instructional use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGeneral mild-steel fabrication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e105–165 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium-plate work\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in (4.8 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150–210 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeavy fillet welds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity:\u003c\/strong\u003e AC is standard; DCEP gives slightly deeper penetration; DCEN maximizes deposition rate on thin material.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eArc length:\u003c\/strong\u003e Keep to approximately one electrode core diameter. E6013 is especially sensitive to long arc length — excess arc gap causes spatter, porosity, and bead flattening. A tight arc produces the characteristic smooth bead the classification is known for.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePosition notes:\u003c\/strong\u003e For vertical-up, reduce amperage 5–10 A below the midrange and use a whip-and-pause or light-weave technique. For overhead, stay at the low end of the range; a short tight arc is essential to prevent dripping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRestart technique:\u003c\/strong\u003e Chip off the slag cap from the crater before restarting to prevent a slag inclusion trap at the restart point.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling for E6013 Stick Welding Rods\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE6013 is non-low-hydrogen and does not require holding oven storage before use. Storage best practices:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed container:\u003c\/strong\u003e Lincoln packages Fleetweld 37 in moisture-resistant sealed metal canisters. In a dry warehouse (below 70 % RH, 40–100 °F), sealed canisters maintain electrode condition indefinitely.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOpen canisters:\u003c\/strong\u003e Reseal between uses. In very humid environments (coastal, high-humidity shops), opened canisters can absorb moisture over a few days and produce slight porosity. A 1-hour bake at 225–250 °F (107–121 °C) will restore the electrode if moisture pickup is suspected.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo oven required:\u003c\/strong\u003e Unlike E7018 or E8018, E6013 does not need to be stored in a 250–300 °F holding oven during production. Take from the sealed can and weld directly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInspect before use:\u003c\/strong\u003e Discard any electrode with cracked, chipped, or flaking coating to prevent slag inclusions and arc instability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types for E6013\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFleetweld 37 is designed for mild and low-alloy carbon steel with CE ≤ 0.35. Suitable base materials:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A36 structural steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A572 Grade 42 and 50\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSAE 1018, 1020, 1025 carbon steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eHot-rolled and cold-rolled mild steel sheet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDo not use Fleetweld 37 on stainless, cast iron, aluminum, or high-alloy steels. Joint types well-suited to E6013 include fillet, lap, and butt joints in flat, horizontal, and positional work on thin to medium plate. For open-root groove welds on thicker plate, E6010 or E6011 gives better penetration control on the root pass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Lincoln Fleetweld 37 E6013 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What makes E6013 easier to weld than E6010?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nE6013 has a titania-sodium\/potassium flux that produces a soft, quiet arc with low spatter and a fluid pool that is easy to control. E6010 uses a cellulosic flux that produces a forceful, digging arc with higher spatter and faster-freezing slag — better for deep penetration and root passes but much harder to run for beginners.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can I run Fleetweld 37 on a 110 V household outlet?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nSmall AC stick welders that plug into a 110 V outlet can run 3\/32 in E6013 at 60–75 A, which is within the machine's duty cycle. Expect shallow fusion on anything thicker than 1\/8 in stock. Most 110 V machines are too underpowered for 1\/8 in E6013 sustained welding.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is Fleetweld 37 good for welding exhaust pipe or automotive sheet metal?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nE6013 is appropriate for automotive body sheet (18–16 gauge) where you have good access and can keep amperage at 60–75 A with a 3\/32 in rod. For thin exhaust tubing (14–16 gauge), TIG is generally better; SMAW on very thin tube risks burn-through and distortion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Do I need a welding code-specified filler for farm equipment repair?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nFor most farm equipment and implement repair (trailers, hitches, implements), no specific filler code is mandated. E6013 is perfectly acceptable and widely used for this work. If a specific strength requirement exists (e.g., a rated hitch repair), check the OEM spec or use E7018 to be safe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the maximum thickness I should weld with E6013?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nE6013 can technically weld thick sections with multiple passes, but for plate over 1\/2 in in high-restraint joints, the non-low-hydrogen nature increases hydrogen cracking risk. Practically, Fleetweld 37 is most at home on material 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in. Above 1\/2 in or in high-restraint joints, switch to E7018 or E7016.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How do I prevent porosity in my E6013 welds?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nMain causes: (1) dirty or wet base metal — clean with a wire brush and degrease; (2) excessive arc length — keep tight arc equal to electrode core diameter; (3) moisture-absorbed electrodes — bake at 225 °F for 1 hour if canisters have been opened in humid conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What amperage for a horizontal fillet on 1\/4 in plate with 1\/8 in Fleetweld 37?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nStart at 110 A for a horizontal fillet on 1\/4 in A36. Adjust slightly down if you see undercut, slightly up if fusion is incomplete at the toes. A typical horizontal fillet at 110–120 A with 1\/8 in E6013 produces a clean 1\/4 in leg fillet in one pass.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What makes E6013 easier to weld than E6010?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"E6013 has a soft-arc titania flux with low spatter and easy pool control. E6010 has a cellulosic flux producing a digging, high-spatter arc that is harder to run but gives deeper penetration for root passes.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I run Fleetweld 37 on a 110V outlet?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Small AC machines on 110V can run 3\/32 in E6013 at 60-75A within duty cycle, but expect limited penetration on anything thicker than 1\/8 in.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Do I need to dry Fleetweld 37 before welding?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"No. E6013 does not require oven drying before use. If the open container has been exposed to high humidity for several days, a 1-hour bake at 225-250°F is a precaution but not code-required.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the max thickness for E6013 welding?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"E6013 is most appropriate for 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in plate. Above 1\/2 in in high-restraint joints, use E7018 to reduce hydrogen cracking risk.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I prevent porosity with E6013?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Clean and degrease base metal, maintain a tight arc equal to one electrode diameter, and bake damp electrodes at 225°F for 1 hour.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What amperage for 1\/8 in fillet on 1\/4 in plate?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Start at 110A for a horizontal fillet on 1\/4 in A36. Adjust down for undercut, up if fusion is incomplete.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Fleetweld 37 good for farm equipment repair?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. E6013 is widely used for trailer, implement, and farm equipment repair where no specific filler code is mandated. Use E7018 if a rated-strength hitch or structural repair is required.\"}}\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eE6013 Welding Rod Selection Guide \u0026amp; Technical Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E6013 welding rod is the most widely used introductory and light-fabrication electrode in the AWS A5.1 family. Its titania-sodium flux produces a soft, quiet arc that instructors and sheet-metal fabricators prize for its controllability. When comparing E6013 stick welding rods, look for consistent coating concentricity (eccentric coatings cause arc deviation and uneven beads), clear flux-to-core adhesion (no visible cracks or chips before packaging), and a labeled AWS classification on the box. Lincoln Fleetweld 37 meets all three criteria and ships in sealed moisture-resistant canisters. For automotive repair and body panel work, the low spatter and smooth bead appearance of E6013 minimize grinding cleanup — critical for visible welds on equipment where aesthetic matters. For welding galvanized or zinc-coated steel (ductwork, HVAC enclosures), E6013 is often used with the galvanizing pre-cleaned locally, though adequate ventilation is essential due to zinc oxide fume hazard. The E6013 classification should not be confused with E7013 (higher tensile, similar flux type) or E6012 (similar tensile, more penetrating, DC-preferred) — each has distinct arc characteristics suited to specific applications.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 1 lb Tube (6-Pack)","offer_id":43638119497879,"sku":"ED033499","price":57.31,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in · 5 lb Tube (4-Pack)","offer_id":43638120841367,"sku":"ED033501","price":100.97,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in","offer_id":46874514948247,"sku":"ED038319","price":174.34,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638019883159,"sku":"ED010161","price":303.75,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 1 lb Tube (6-Pack)","offer_id":43638120317079,"sku":"ED033500","price":54.5,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 5 lb Tube (4-Pack)","offer_id":43638121726103,"sku":"ED033502","price":104.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in","offer_id":47594536239255,"sku":"ED038320","price":205.92,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 5 lb Tube (4-Pack)","offer_id":43638123004055,"sku":"ED033503","price":117.96,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in","offer_id":47594848583831,"sku":"ED038321","price":205.92,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":43638020604055,"sku":"ED010165","price":271.75,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/16 in · 1 lb Tube","offer_id":45224768602263,"sku":"ED029897","price":62.71,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/64 in · 1 lb Tube","offer_id":45224768700567,"sku":"ED029898","price":59.4,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed033499-fleetweld-37-rsp-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-12-in-6-1-lb-tubes-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594448"},{"product_id":"lincoln-fleetweld-47-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Fleetweld 47 E7014 Stick Welding Rod","description":"\u003cp\u003eLincoln Fleetweld 47 is Lincoln Electric's premier E7014 welding rod — a titania iron-powder SMAW electrode built for fast deposition, effortless arc starts, and self-peeling slag on mild carbon steel. Rated to a minimum 72,000 psi tensile strength, Fleetweld 47 satisfies AWS D1.1 prequalified WPS requirements and runs on AC, DCEP, or DCEN, making it a top pick for shops that weld on older transformer machines alongside modern inverter power sources.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat Is the Lincoln Fleetweld 47 E7014 Welding Rod?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFleetweld 47 is Lincoln Electric's flagship E7014 iron-powder stick electrode. The AWS designation breaks down as follows: \"E\" = electrode; \"70\" = 70,000 psi minimum tensile; \"1\" = all-position; \"4\" = titania-iron-powder flux covering compatible with AC, DCEP, and DCEN. The iron-powder addition (≈ 30 % by flux weight) drives deposition efficiency higher than a bare titania rod, so Fleetweld 47 lays down metal faster than an E6011 or E6013 at equal amperage. Lincoln's proprietary flux blend produces a smooth fluid pool, fast-freezing slag that peels cleanly, and an attractive bead appearance that often needs no secondary grinding on non-critical joints. The Fleetweld family has been a North American shop standard for decades; the 47 variant sits above Fleetweld 37 (E6013) in tensile strength and deposition rate, and below the low-hydrogen Excalibur 7018 family for hydrogen-critical work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBecause E7014 carries iron powder in the flux coating rather than a cellulosic or basic lime covering, it bridges the gap between beginner-friendly E6013 rods and the more demanding E7018 low-hydrogen family. The result is a rod that any intermediate welder can run smoothly while still meeting AWS structural steel code requirements for most general structural applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Mechanical Specs — E7014 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFleetweld 47 is classified under AWS A5.1\/A5.1M E7014 and also meets Canadian Standard CSA W48 requirements. Key mechanical properties from the weld metal certification data sheet:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProperty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS Classification\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eE7014\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTensile Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e72,000 psi (496 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYield Strength (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60,000 psi (414 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElongation (min.)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17%\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlux Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTitania \/ iron-powder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurrent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC, DCEP, DCEN\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWelding Position\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll (F, H, V-up, OH)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable Diameters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32, 1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH-Designation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot classified (non-low-hydrogen)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE7014 is not a low-hydrogen electrode; its diffusible hydrogen output can exceed 16 mL\/100g, so it is not appropriate for hydrogen-crack-sensitive, thick-section, or highly restrained joints. For those applications use Lincoln Excalibur 7018 MR (E7018-H4R). Fleetweld 47 is approved for AWS D1.1 Table 4.5 prequalified WPS on Category I and II base metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for Fleetweld 47 E7014 Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe E7014 welding rod profile — higher deposition than E6013, AC-capable, non-low-hydrogen — makes Fleetweld 47 ideal for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral shop fabrication on A36, A572, A516 steel\u003c\/strong\u003e — frames, brackets, conveyors, enclosures, and general structural steel under 1 in thick.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStructural tack welding and fitup passes\u003c\/strong\u003e — the fast-freeze slag lets you tack quickly and reposition assemblies without waiting for cooling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFillet welds on light structural steel (3\/16 in – 3\/4 in)\u003c\/strong\u003e — self-peeling slag and attractive bead reduce cleanup time on exposed welds.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance and repair on carbon steel equipment\u003c\/strong\u003e — tolerates light mill scale and surface contamination better than E7018.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAC-only job sites\u003c\/strong\u003e — runs stably on older 230 V transformer buzz-boxes and portable AC welders commonly found in field maintenance trailers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTraining and production welding where E7018 is not code-required\u003c\/strong\u003e — easier to run, faster cleanup, no oven storage requirement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDo not use Fleetweld 47 for: stainless or dissimilar metal, cast iron, hardfacing, high-yield applications requiring Charpy CVN certification, or pipe root passes where cellulosic penetrators are specified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Fleetweld 47 — Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position Settings\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the following amperage table as a starting point; final settings depend on your specific machine, plate thickness, and joint configuration:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical Travel Speed\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70–110 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8–12 in\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100–150 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10–14 in\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e130–190 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12–18 in\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in (4.8 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e175–250 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e14–20 in\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n  \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity guidance:\u003c\/strong\u003e AC is the most common choice for Fleetweld 47, especially on transformer machines. DCEP delivers slightly deeper penetration and better fill on thicker plate. DCEN improves deposition efficiency on thinner material where burn-through is a risk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePosition technique:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cem\u003eFlat\/horizontal:\u003c\/em\u003e Run straight or a slight weave, 5–15° drag angle, 1× core diameter arc length.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cem\u003eVertical-up:\u003c\/em\u003e Reduce amperage 10–15 A below midrange; use a triangular weave or J-weave to let each shelf solidify before advancing. Keep arc length tight.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cem\u003eOverhead:\u003c\/em\u003e Use the lower end of the amperage range; short arc; forehand technique with a slight push angle to direct molten metal into the joint.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCommon defects and corrections:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cem\u003eUndercut at toes\u003c\/em\u003e — reduce amperage 5–10 A or reduce travel speed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cem\u003ePorosity\u003c\/em\u003e — check for moisture, contamination, or excessive arc length; ensure base metal is clean and dry.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cem\u003eSlag inclusions in multi-pass welds\u003c\/em\u003e — ensure thorough inter-pass slag removal; use a chipping hammer and wire brush before each new pass.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling of E7014 Iron-Powder Electrodes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eE7014 is non-low-hydrogen. Unlike E7018, it does not require a 250–300 °F holding oven before use under most circumstances. However, proper storage still matters:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed containers:\u003c\/strong\u003e Lincoln Fleetweld 47 ships in a sealed metal container that prevents moisture ingress for an indefinite shelf life under normal dry warehouse conditions (below 70 % RH, 40–100 °F).\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOpen containers:\u003c\/strong\u003e Once opened, keep the can sealed between uses. In humid climates (above 80 % RH), partial canisters left open overnight may absorb enough moisture to cause minor porosity — a 1-hour dry-out at 250 °F (121 °C) before the next use is sufficient.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRe-drying:\u003c\/strong\u003e If heavily wetted, dry at 250–300 °F for 1 hour. Never exceed 350 °F — excessive heat degrades the titania-iron-powder covering and can cause coating checks or pop-offs during welding.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHandle with care:\u003c\/strong\u003e Avoid dropping containers or allowing electrodes to become bent. A bent electrode causes erratic arc movement and uneven deposition.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDiscard damaged electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e Any electrode with cracked, chipped, or peeling flux should be discarded before welding to prevent slag inclusions and weld quality issues.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types for E7014 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFleetweld 47 is formulated for mild and low-alloy carbon steels with carbon equivalent (CE) ≤ 0.40. Compatible base materials include:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A36 structural steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A572 Grade 42, 50, 60, 65\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A516 Grade 55, 60, 65, 70 (pressure vessel plate)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eASTM A588 weathering steel (non-structural, non-atmospheric-exposed)\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003cli\u003eSAE 1010, 1018, 1020, 1040 carbon steel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDo not use Fleetweld 47 on stainless steels, cast iron, aluminum, copper alloys, or high-carbon\/tool steels. For dissimilar or stainless work, consult Lincoln's filler metal selector.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint geometry:\u003c\/strong\u003e Fleetweld 47 excels in fillet, lap, and T-joints in flat and horizontal positions. Butt joints in vertical and overhead are possible with good technique. For groove butt joints requiring full-penetration in high-restraint applications, use a low-hydrogen electrode (E7018) to reduce hydrogen cracking risk. For open-root butt joints on pipe, use a cellulosic E6010 or E6011 for the root pass, then fill and cap with Fleetweld 47 or E7018 as required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMinimum preheat:\u003c\/strong\u003e For A36 plate up to 3\/4 in thick in ambient above 32 °F, no preheat is required per AWS D1.1. For thicker material or higher CE steels, preheat per the applicable fabrication code. Because E7014 is not low-hydrogen, use conservative preheat when in doubt to prevent cold cracking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Fleetweld 47 E7014 Welding Rod\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the difference between E7014 and E7018?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nE7014 (Fleetweld 47) uses titania-iron-powder flux; it is compatible with AC, DCEP, and DCEN, and does not require a holding oven before welding. E7018 uses low-hydrogen iron-powder flux, requires DCEP or selected AC machines, and must be kept in a 250–300 °F holding oven once the container is opened. E7018 is specified by code for high-restraint, thick-section, or hydrogen-crack-sensitive joints. For general fabrication where code doesn't mandate low-hydrogen, E7014 is faster and easier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can I weld with Fleetweld 47 on an old buzzbox AC welder?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes. E7014 was specifically engineered for AC compatibility and will run smoothly on 60 Hz transformer-type machines. Set amperage in the midrange for the rod diameter (e.g., 120–130 A for 1\/8 in) and expect easy arc starts and stable operation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Do I need to dry Fleetweld 47 before welding?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nGenerally no — take rods directly from the sealed Lincoln container and weld. If the container has been open for days in high humidity, a 1-hour dry-out at 250 °F is a prudent precaution but not a code requirement for E7014.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is E7014 strong enough for structural steel welding per AWS D1.1?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nYes. AWS D1.1 Table 4.5 lists E7014 as an approved filler for prequalified WPS on Group I and II base metals. It is not approved for Demand Critical welds (DM) or Charpy CVN-required joints without additional qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What diameter Fleetweld 47 should I use for 3\/8 in fillet welds?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nA 1\/8 in or 5\/32 in electrode is appropriate for a 3\/8 in fillet weld on structural plate. Use 5\/32 in at 160–180 A for a single-pass fillet; use 1\/8 in at 130 A for better control in tight access situations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How does Fleetweld 47 compare to Fleetweld 37 (E6013)?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nBoth are beginner-friendly titania-type rods. Fleetweld 37 (E6013) has a 67,000 psi minimum tensile and is even more tolerant of thin gauge and poor fit-up. Fleetweld 47 (E7014) has a 72,000 psi minimum and higher iron-powder content, making it faster and stronger — better suited where code requires 70 ksi filler metal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is the shelf life of Fleetweld 47 in a sealed can?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\nIn the original sealed Lincoln container, stored in a dry area below 70 % RH and between 40–100 °F, Fleetweld 47 has an indefinite shelf life. The hermetically sealed packaging maintains flux condition for years of warehouse storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the difference between E7014 and E7018?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"E7014 uses titania-iron-powder flux, runs on AC\/DCEP\/DCEN, and needs no oven storage. E7018 is low-hydrogen, requires DCEP or specific AC machines, and must be kept in a 250-300°F oven once opened — it is specified for high-restraint, thick-section, or hydrogen-crack-sensitive joints.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I run Fleetweld 47 on an AC buzzbox welder?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. E7014 is designed for AC and runs smoothly on 60 Hz transformer machines at the recommended amperage range.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Do I need to dry Fleetweld 47 before welding?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Generally no. Take rods directly from the sealed container. If exposed to high humidity for days, a 1-hour dry-out at 250°F is prudent but not code-required.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is E7014 approved for AWS D1.1 structural welding?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. E7014 is listed in AWS D1.1 Table 4.5 for prequalified WPS on Group I and II base metals.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What diameter for 3\/8 in fillet welds?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Use 1\/8 in or 5\/32 in electrode. 5\/32 in at 160-180 A makes a good single-pass 3\/8 in fillet; 1\/8 in at 130 A for tighter access.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How does Fleetweld 47 compare to Fleetweld 37?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Fleetweld 37 (E6013) is more forgiving on thin gauge at 67,000 psi tensile min. Fleetweld 47 (E7014) is faster and stronger at 72,000 psi with higher iron-powder content — better where code requires 70 ksi filler.\"}},\n    {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the shelf life in a sealed can?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Indefinite in the sealed Lincoln container stored in a dry warehouse below 70% RH between 40-100°F.\"}}\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eE7014 Welding Rod Technical Comparison \u0026amp; Buying Guide\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting an E7014 welding rod for your shop or jobsite, the key decision factors are tensile strength grade, current compatibility, and iron-powder content. E7014 delivers 70 ksi class tensile strength — sufficient for most structural carbon steel applications under AWS D1.1. Lincoln Fleetweld 47's iron-powder flux gives it the edge over bare titania rods (E6013) in deposition rate, while its AC compatibility makes it usable on older machines that won't run E7018 reliably. For any application requiring low hydrogen (H-designated) weld metal, upgrade to Lincoln Excalibur 7018 or IronArc 7018. For any application where only AC power is available and E7014 tensile class is sufficient, Fleetweld 47 is the optimal choice. The E7014 classification falls squarely in the \"middle tier\" of structural SMAW electrodes — above E6013, below E7018 — making it the practical everyday rod for general fabrication shops that need code-compliant carbon steel joints without the oven-storage requirements of low-hydrogen filler metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeld quality indicators for E7014: bead profile is flat to slightly convex; width-to-depth ratio approximately 2.5:1; fusion line should be smooth with no undercut at plate-weld interface; slag releases cleanly as one piece leaving a bright, spatter-free surface in flat and horizontal positions. Root face examination after single-pass fillet on 3\/16 in plate should show full fusion to both plate surfaces with a minimum 3\/32 in throat dimension for a 1\/8 in nominal fillet weld.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 1 lb Tube (6-Pack)","offer_id":43638123856023,"sku":"ED033504","price":57.17,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in · 5 lb Tube (4-Pack)","offer_id":43638125166743,"sku":"ED033506","price":103.06,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in · 8 lb Carton","offer_id":45224757198999,"sku":"ED038097","price":192.57,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 1 lb Tube (6-Pack)","offer_id":43638124085399,"sku":"ED033505","price":55.94,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 5 lb Tube (4-Pack)","offer_id":43638126674071,"sku":"ED033507","price":103.92,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in","offer_id":45224757231767,"sku":"ED038098","price":220.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 5 lb Tube (4-Pack)","offer_id":43638089973911,"sku":"ED033508","price":115.58,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in","offer_id":45224757264535,"sku":"ED038099","price":228.52,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in","offer_id":45224757330071,"sku":"ED038100","price":215.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed033504-fleetweld-47-rsp-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-14-in-6-1-lb-tubes-lincoln-electric.jpg?v=1765594447"},{"product_id":"lincoln-fleetweld-5p-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Lincoln Fleetweld 5P+ E6010 Stick Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- Stick Lane A | handle: lincoln-fleetweld-5p-stick-smaw-welding-rod | 2026-06-16 --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eLincoln Fleetweld 5P+ E6010 — Overview\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLincoln Fleetweld 5P+\u003c\/strong\u003e is the industry benchmark E6010 cellulosic-coated SMAW electrode for open-root pipe welding, cross-country pipeline construction, and structural field repair. Classified to \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E6010\u003c\/strong\u003e, Fleetweld 5P+ delivers a stiff, driving arc with deep penetration and fast-freeze slag that provides superior weld pool control in all positions — overhead, vertical-up, and vertical-down. Its cellulosic coating burns aggressively to cut through mill scale, rust, dirt, and moisture-contaminated surfaces without sacrificing bead quality, making it the first-choice root-pass electrode wherever surface prep is limited. \u003cstrong\u003eDC+ (DCEP) power only\u003c\/strong\u003e; not designed for AC service. WeldingMart is a Lincoln Electric authorized distributor offering factory-fresh stock across all diameters and package formats.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-specs\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E6010\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCoating type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCellulosic (high-cellulose sodium)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ (DCEP) only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions: 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G (flat, horizontal, vertical, overhead)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60,000 psi (414 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum yield strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e48,000 psi (331 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElongation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22% minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCharpy V-notch impact\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot required by AWS A5.1 for E6010\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in: 50–90 A | 1\/8 in: 75–125 A | 5\/32 in: 110–165 A | 3\/16 in: 140–210 A | 7\/32 in: 170–250 A | 1\/4 in: 210–320 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32, 1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16, 7\/32, 1\/4 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLincoln Electric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M; AWS D1.1 pre-qualified\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-applications\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eApplications \u0026amp; Industries\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFleetweld 5P+ is the dominant electrode for \u003cstrong\u003ecross-country pipeline root passes\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003estructural field repair\u003c\/strong\u003e where surface condition, position access, and weld quality cannot be compromised. Typical applications include:\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOil and gas pipeline:\u003c\/strong\u003e API 1104 root passes on carbon steel line pipe, cross-country mainline and tie-in spools\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStructural fabrication:\u003c\/strong\u003e AWS D1.1 structural steel, heavy plate tack and root passes\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eField repair and maintenance:\u003c\/strong\u003e Dirty, rusty, or painted steel where surface prep is impractical — farm equipment, railcar repair, construction equipment\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGalvanized and mill-scaled steel:\u003c\/strong\u003e The driving arc burns through coatings that would cause porosity in rutile electrodes\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eShipbuilding and offshore:\u003c\/strong\u003e Root passes on hull plate and structural members in all-position environments\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technique\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eProcess Technology — How to Run E6010\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE6010 requires higher open-circuit voltage and a more aggressive arc technique than rutile or low-hydrogen electrodes. Key running tips:\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMachine requirement:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use a constant-current (CC) DC+ source with OCV ≥ 65 V. Inverter machines must be E6010-rated; not all inverters handle cellulosic electrodes reliably.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eArc start:\u003c\/strong\u003e Scratch-start or use the machine's lift-arc mode. Maintain a short arc length equal to approximately the rod diameter.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eArc length control:\u003c\/strong\u003e Keep the arc tight. A long arc with E6010 causes porosity and loss of penetration. \"Whip and pause\" technique (1–2× rod diameter whip, pause to allow freeze) is standard for vertical welding.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTravel angle:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5–10° drag angle for flat and horizontal; vertical-up 5–10° push with whip-and-pause; vertical-down 15–20° push for fast downhill pipe root passes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInterpass temperature:\u003c\/strong\u003e Follow applicable code (AWS D1.1 or API 1104). Preheat per base material carbon equivalent for higher CE steels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSlag removal:\u003c\/strong\u003e The fast-freeze slag chips easily with a chipping hammer; wire brush between passes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-storage\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE6010 is a cellulosic electrode — it \u003cstrong\u003erequires moisture\u003c\/strong\u003e in the coating for optimal arc performance and is not a low-hydrogen electrode. Unlike E7018, E6010 should \u003cstrong\u003enot\u003c\/strong\u003e be stored in a drying oven. Recommended storage:\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eStore in original sealed container in a dry area at ambient temperature (40–120°F \/ 4–49°C)\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eDo not overbake — oven temperatures that work for E7018 will destroy the cellulosic coating and cause arc instability\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eElectrodes exposed to wet conditions can be air-dried at room temperature; do not use wet rods\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eOnce opened, use within a reasonable period and reseal packaging if storing partially used cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-faq\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cdl\u003e\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is E6010 used for?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eE6010 is the standard electrode for open-root pipe welding in oil and gas and structural applications. Its cellulosic coating creates a driving, fast-freeze arc that provides complete root fusion in all positions — particularly for API 1104 pipeline root passes and AWS D1.1 structural root runs where radiographic quality is required.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eCan I run E6010 on an AC welder?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eNo. E6010 is DC+ (DCEP) only. For AC welding machines, use \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-fleetweld-7-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eLincoln Fleetweld 7 (E6011)\u003c\/a\u003e, which is formulated for AC and DC operation. Not all inverter machines support E6010 — confirm your machine lists E6010 compatibility before purchasing.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is the difference between 6010 and 6011?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eBoth are 60 ksi cellulosic all-position electrodes, but E6010 is DC+ only with a stiffer, more penetrating arc. E6011 adds potassium to the coating allowing stable AC operation, making it more versatile on older farm machines and transformer-based welders. For critical pipe root passes on DC, E6010 is preferred for arc stability and penetration control.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is the difference between 6010 and 7018?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eE6010 is a fast-freeze cellulosic electrode used primarily for root passes; E7018 is a low-hydrogen iron-powder electrode used for fill and cap passes on structural and pressure vessel code work. Many pipeline welding procedures call for an E6010 root pass followed by E7018 fill and cap — pair the Fleetweld 5P+ root with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-excalibur-7018-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018\u003c\/a\u003e hot pass and fill.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eDoes Fleetweld 5P need oven storage?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eNo. Fleetweld 5P+ (E6010) is a cellulosic electrode — it relies on inherent coating moisture for proper arc performance and should never be stored in a drying oven. Store sealed at ambient temperature. This is the opposite of E7018 low-hydrogen rods, which require oven storage after opening.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat sizes does Lincoln Fleetweld 5P+ come in?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eWeldingMart stocks Fleetweld 5P+ from 3\/32 in (2.4 mm) through 1\/4 in (6.4 mm) diameter in 1-lb hobby packs, 5-lb and 10-lb cartons, and 50-lb master cases. Select the diameter and pack size in the variant selector above.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n  \u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-crosslinks\"\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse the full electrode range:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — or pair your E6010 root pass with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-excalibur-7018-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eLincoln Excalibur 7018 for fill and cap\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is E6010 used for?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"E6010 is the standard electrode for open-root pipe welding in oil and gas and structural applications. Its cellulosic coating creates a driving, fast-freeze arc that provides complete root fusion in all positions, particularly for API 1104 pipeline root passes and AWS D1.1 structural root runs where radiographic quality is required.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Can I run E6010 on an AC welder?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No. E6010 is DC+ (DCEP) only. For AC welding machines, use Lincoln Fleetweld 7 (E6011), which is formulated for AC and DC operation.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the difference between 6010 and 7018?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"E6010 is a fast-freeze cellulosic electrode used primarily for root passes; E7018 is a low-hydrogen iron-powder electrode used for fill and cap passes on structural and pressure vessel code work. Many pipeline welding procedures call for an E6010 root pass followed by E7018 fill and cap passes.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Does Fleetweld 5P need oven storage?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"No. Fleetweld 5P+ (E6010) is a cellulosic electrode that relies on inherent coating moisture for proper arc performance and should never be stored in a drying oven. Store sealed at ambient temperature.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Lincoln Electric","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 5 lb Tube (4-Pack)","offer_id":43638090694807,"sku":"ED033509","price":104.85,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638107537559,"sku":"ED032564","price":224.43,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED010211)","offer_id":43638028206231,"sku":"ED010211","price":312.7,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED010283)","offer_id":43638031024279,"sku":"ED010283","price":340.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 5 lb Tube (4-Pack)","offer_id":43638092071063,"sku":"ED033510","price":99.78,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638109012119,"sku":"ED032565","price":216.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED010203)","offer_id":43638026371223,"sku":"ED010203","price":307.19,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED010278)","offer_id":43638029648023,"sku":"ED010278","price":289.75,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 5 lb Tube (4-Pack)","offer_id":43638092136599,"sku":"ED033511","price":103.68,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 10 lb Easy Open Can (3-Pack)","offer_id":43638109241495,"sku":"ED032566","price":213.92,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED010216)","offer_id":43638028370071,"sku":"ED010216","price":278.75,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED010285)","offer_id":43638031319191,"sku":"ED010285","price":308.68,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED010207)","offer_id":43638026797207,"sku":"ED010207","price":291.06,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can (ED010281)","offer_id":43638030139543,"sku":"ED010281","price":280.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"7\/32 in · 50 lb Easy Open Can","offer_id":47647590842519,"sku":"ED038362","price":262.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/lincoln-ed010203-fleetweld-5p-stick-smaw-welding-rod-18-14-in-50-lb-easy-open-can-lincoln-electric_44aa08e6-fc1c-4930-9b6e-1f14a74760e2.jpg?v=1778871289"},{"product_id":"harris-6013-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Harris 6013 Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- Stick Lane A | handle: harris-6013-stick-smaw-welding-rod | 2026-06-16 --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eHarris 6013 E6013 Stick Electrode — Overview\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHarris 6013\u003c\/strong\u003e is an \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E6013\u003c\/strong\u003e rutile-coated SMAW electrode delivering 60 ksi minimum tensile strength with an exceptionally smooth, easy-to-start arc on \u003cstrong\u003eAC, DC+, or DC− power\u003c\/strong\u003e in all welding positions. The high-titania (rutile) coating produces a fluid weld puddle, quiet arc, minimal spatter, and self-releasing slag that lifts off with almost no effort — making Harris 6013 the most accessible entry electrode for beginning welders, light fabrication, and applications where a clean bead appearance is the priority. Unlike cellulosic (6010\/6011) and low-hydrogen (7018) electrodes that require more specific machine types and technique, the 6013 runs reliably on AC farm welders, small DC inverters, and automotive-type shop machines. WeldingMart stocks Harris 6013 in 3\/32, 1\/8, and 5\/32 in diameters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-specs\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E6013\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCoating type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRutile (high-titania)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC, DC+ (DCEP), or DC− (DCEN) — all current types\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions: 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G (flat, horizontal, vertical, overhead)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60,000 psi (414 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum yield strength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e48,000 psi (331 MPa)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElongation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17% minimum\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in: 40–80 A | 1\/8 in: 70–120 A | 5\/32 in: 100–160 A | 3\/16 in: 130–200 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32, 1\/8, 5\/32, 3\/16 in\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHarris Products Group\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.1\/A5.1M E6013\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-applications\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eApplications \u0026amp; Industries\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris 6013 is the all-purpose electrode for light and medium fabrication, maintenance, and training environments:\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral fabrication:\u003c\/strong\u003e Sheet metal, light structural steel, farm equipment, gates, fencing, and brackets — anywhere a smooth bead and easy technique are valued\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance and repair:\u003c\/strong\u003e Shop maintenance on mild steel and low-alloy steel components where code weld quality is not required\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWelding training and vocational education:\u003c\/strong\u003e The 6013 is the standard beginner electrode in welding schools because its forgiving arc, easy slag removal, and all-polarity operation remove barriers to learning basic technique\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFarm and ranch welding:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ideal for AC-only buzzboxes; runs on the small transformer welders commonly found in farm shops\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHobby and home shop welding:\u003c\/strong\u003e Sheet metal projects, automotive, ornamental iron — any application where bead appearance and ease of use matter more than code compliance\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technique\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eProcess Technology — How to Run E6013\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE6013 is the most forgiving SMAW electrode and an excellent starting point for learning stick technique:\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eArc starting:\u003c\/strong\u003e Scratch-start or tap-start on AC; easy arc initiation even with basic farm welders. The rutile coating ionizes well, supporting stable arc starts at low OCV.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eArc length:\u003c\/strong\u003e Slightly longer arc length than E6010 is tolerable — the rutile slag shields the weld pool. Maintain approximately 1× rod diameter. Too long an arc increases spatter; too short causes sticking.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTravel angle:\u003c\/strong\u003e 5–15° drag (push for vertical-up). The fluid slag follows the arc and provides good protection without demanding precise technique.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVertical welding:\u003c\/strong\u003e Whip-and-pause is not necessary for 6013. A short pause with slight weave or steady upward progression works well vertical-up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSlag removal:\u003c\/strong\u003e One of the easiest slags to remove in stick welding — often lifts off on its own as the joint cools. Light chipping and wire brushing gives a clean bead for the next pass.\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCurrent adjustment:\u003c\/strong\u003e Start at the low end of the current range for thin material; go to mid or upper range for thicker plate to achieve full penetration.\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-storage\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris 6013 is a rutile electrode — \u003cstrong\u003eno special storage requirements\u003c\/strong\u003e. Unlike low-hydrogen E7018, 6013 is not moisture-sensitive in normal shop environments:\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eStore in original sealed packaging in a dry location at ambient temperature\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eOven storage is not required and not recommended for E6013\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eIf rods have been exposed to significant moisture, air-dry at room temperature before use\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eFor long-term storage, keep in original box or a dry electrode storage cabinet\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-faq\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cdl\u003e\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is the difference between 6011 and 6013 welding rods?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eBoth E6011 and E6013 deposit 60 ksi weld metal and run in all positions. E6011 is a cellulosic electrode with a more aggressive, penetrating arc — it cuts through dirt, rust, and mill scale and is the go-to choice for pipeline root passes and field repair. E6013 has a softer, quieter rutile arc with better bead appearance, easier slag removal, and no penetration benefit on dirty metal. For clean, thin-to-medium plate fabrication and training, 6013 is preferred. For contaminated metal or root pass work, 6011 is the better choice.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eCan 6013 be used for structural welding?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eE6013 is an AWS A5.1 prequalified electrode but is generally not the preferred choice for structural code welding (AWS D1.1) due to its higher hydrogen levels compared to E7018 low-hydrogen electrodes. For AWS D1.1 structural work on carbon steel, E7018 is the industry standard. E6013 is appropriate for light fabrication and non-code work. Confirm with your WPS and applicable code before using 6013 on structural applications.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat is 6013 welding rod used for?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eHarris 6013 is used for general-purpose mild steel fabrication, maintenance welding, and training. It excels on thin-to-medium plate where bead appearance matters, on AC-only farm welders, and in school welding training environments. Typical uses: sheet metal, light structural, farm equipment repair, ornamental iron, and home shop projects.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eIs 6013 or 7018 better for beginners?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eFor learning basic stick welding technique, 6013 is generally easier to start — it runs on AC or DC, starts reliably at low amperage, and has forgiving slag. However, 7018 is the professional standard for structural work, and many welding programs teach 7018 from the beginning. If your goal is structural or code welding, learn on 7018. If you are learning on a small AC welder or for hobby use, start with 6013.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n\n    \u003cdt\u003eWhat machines can I use with 6013?\u003c\/dt\u003e\n    \u003cdd\u003eHarris 6013 runs on virtually any stick welding machine — AC transformer welders (farm buzzboxes), DC inverters, DC engine-driven welders, and AC\/DC combination machines. It is the most widely compatible electrode classification in the AWS A5.1 standard, making it ideal for welders with older or lower-end machines.\u003c\/dd\u003e\n  \u003c\/dl\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-crosslinks\"\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse all stick electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — or compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/lincoln-7018-ac-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eLincoln 7018-AC\u003c\/a\u003e for low-hydrogen structural work on AC machines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e\n{\n  \"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\",\n  \"@type\": \"FAQPage\",\n  \"mainEntity\": [\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is the difference between 6011 and 6013 welding rods?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"E6011 is a cellulosic electrode with a penetrating arc for dirty metal and root pass work. E6013 has a softer rutile arc with better bead appearance and easier slag removal for clean, thin-to-medium plate fabrication and training. For contaminated metal or root passes, use 6011. For appearance welds and training, use 6013.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What is 6013 welding rod used for?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Harris 6013 is used for general-purpose mild steel fabrication, maintenance welding, and training. It excels on thin-to-medium plate, AC-only farm welders, and school training environments. Typical uses: sheet metal, light structural, farm equipment repair, and home shop projects.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"Is 6013 or 7018 better for beginners?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"For learning basic stick technique, 6013 is easier — it runs on AC or DC, starts at low amperage, and has forgiving slag. However, 7018 is the professional standard for structural work. If your goal is structural welding, learn 7018. For hobby use or a small AC welder, start with 6013.\"\n      }\n    },\n    {\n      \"@type\": \"Question\",\n      \"name\": \"What machines can I use with 6013?\",\n      \"acceptedAnswer\": {\n        \"@type\": \"Answer\",\n        \"text\": \"Harris 6013 runs on AC transformer welders, DC inverters, DC engine-driven welders, and AC\/DC combination machines — the most widely compatible electrode in AWS A5.1.\"\n      }\n    }\n  ]\n}\n\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"WeldingMart.com","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 5 lb Box","offer_id":44258844573847,"sku":"6013505","price":67.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/32 in · 10 lb Box","offer_id":44258851061911,"sku":"60135010","price":38.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in · 5 lb Tube","offer_id":44258851094679,"sku":"6013705","price":22.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/harris-6013-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-5-box-6013505-harris-1.jpg?v=1753396289"},{"product_id":"harris-alloy-26-aluminum-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Harris Alloy 26 Aluminum Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003c!-- PER-161 Template A parent body | handle harris-alloy-26-aluminum-stick-smaw-welding-rod | bulk render --\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-pdp-intro\"\u003e\n  \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHarris Alloy 26 Aluminum\u003c\/strong\u003e is an AWS A5.3\/A5.3M E4043 SMAW stick electrode family with 17 ksi minimum (as-welded aluminum) tensile and DC+ only, flat position only operation. WeldingMart stocks 2 package and diameter variants of this grade, all sharing the same AWS classification - select the diameter and package format that fits your application below.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-grade-summary\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eAbout Harris Alloy 26 Aluminum\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eE4043 is an AWS A5.3 aluminum SMAW electrode with a ~5% silicon aluminum core and a moisture-resistant flux coating, designed for stick welding of 1100, 3003, 5052, and 6061 aluminum alloys and aluminum castings. The Si addition lowers melt temperature and improves fluidity. Aluminum SMAW has largely been displaced by GMAW and GTAW for production work but remains valuable for field repair where shielding gas is not available. Runs DC+ only in the flat position; preheat 300-400  deg F is required on thicker sections to avoid lack of fusion.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-spec-overview\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"grade-spec-table\"\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAWS A5.3\/A5.3M E4043\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMinimum tensile\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17 ksi minimum (as-welded aluminum)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePolarity \/ position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC+ only, flat position only\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAvailable diameters\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in through 1\/4 in (varies by package)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackage formats\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003esee size variants below\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"parent-buy-confidence\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eWhy buy Harris Alloy 26 Aluminum from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cul\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrand-authorized distributor\u003c\/strong\u003e - factory-fresh stock, full warranty pass-through\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eMultiple diameter and package variants in stock - select the SKU below that matches your job\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003eUS warehouse fulfillment, 1 business day ship time\u003c\/li\u003e\n    \u003cli\u003e30-day returns on unopened cartons\u003c\/li\u003e\n  \u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"WeldingMart.com","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in · 5 lb Tube","offer_id":44258824421527,"sku":"0002650","price":275.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in · 5 lb Tube","offer_id":44258824585367,"sku":"0002660","price":158.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/harris-26-aluminum-welding-rod-332-5-pkg-0002650-harris-1.jpg?v=1753396986"},{"product_id":"harris-308l-stainless-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Harris 308L Stainless Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003ch2\u003eHarris 308L Stainless Steel Stick Electrode — What Is E308L-16?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHarris 308L\u003c\/strong\u003e is an \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E308L-16\u003c\/strong\u003e austenitic stainless steel SMAW electrode for welding Type 304L, 304, 308, and 308L stainless steel base metals on \u003cstrong\u003eDC+ (DCEP)\u003c\/strong\u003e in all positions. The \"L\" designation signifies extra-low carbon content (≤0.04% C in the undiluted weld metal), which minimizes carbide precipitation (sensitization) at the grain boundaries during the weld thermal cycle — critical for maintaining corrosion resistance in as-welded condition without post-weld heat treatment. The \"-16\" suffix designates a lime\/titania coating type optimized for AC or DC+ operation in all positions with excellent slag release and bead appearance. Harris 308L is the standard stainless electrode for food service equipment, chemical processing, pharmaceutical installations, dairy, and any Type 304 stainless application requiring as-welded corrosion resistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable style=\"min-width: 50px\"\u003e\n\u003ccolgroup\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003c\/colgroup\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E308L-16\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eCoating type\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eLime\/titania (-16 type)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003ePolarity\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eDC+ (DCEP) preferred; AC acceptable\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAll positions (F, H, V, OH)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWeld metal carbon (max)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e0.04% C (extra-low carbon \"L\" grade)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWeld metal Cr content\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e18.0–21.0% Cr\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWeld metal Ni content\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e9.0–11.0% Ni\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin tensile strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e80,000 psi (552 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin yield strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e58,000 psi (400 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eElongation\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e35% minimum\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e3\/32 in: 40–75 A | 1\/8 in: 60–100 A | 5\/32 in: 80–130 A\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris Products Group\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E308L-16\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for Harris 308L Stainless Electrode\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eType 304\/304L stainless steel fabrication:\u003c\/strong\u003e The primary electrode for welding 18-8 austenitic stainless — tanks, vessels, piping, and structures fabricated from 304 or 304L stainless in food service, chemical, and pharmaceutical industries\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFood and dairy equipment:\u003c\/strong\u003e Low carbon content maintains corrosion resistance after welding without post-weld anneal; acceptable for FDA-regulated food contact applications when properly cleaned\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eChemical and process equipment:\u003c\/strong\u003e Corrosion-resistant service in dilute acids, alkalis, and oxidizing environments where 304-grade stainless is specified\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePharmaceutical and biotech:\u003c\/strong\u003e Sanitary welds on pharmaceutical processing vessels, transfer lines, and piping where surface quality and corrosion resistance are mandatory\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eArchitectural stainless:\u003c\/strong\u003e Handrails, cladding, and decorative stainless steel fabrication where appearance welds and corrosion resistance in exposed environments are required\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRepair and maintenance of 304 stainless equipment:\u003c\/strong\u003e In-place repair of tanks, vessels, and piping in service environments where base metal was 304 or 308 stainless\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Harris 308L (Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position)\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAmperage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Run stainless electrodes at lower amperages than equivalent-diameter carbon steel electrodes. For 1\/8 in 308L, 60–100 A is the working range. Low amperage reduces heat input and minimizes the risk of sensitization and hot cracking. Do not overheat the joint.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity:\u003c\/strong\u003e DC+ (DCEP) is standard and preferred for E308L-16. AC is permitted by the \"-16\" designation and usable in field situations without DC machines, though DC+ gives more stable arc and better mechanical properties.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInterpass temperature:\u003c\/strong\u003e Maximum interpass temperature for austenitic stainless is 350°F (177°C). Exceeding this promotes sensitization and hot cracking. Measure interpass temperature with a contact thermometer — do not rely on visual judgment. Allow the joint to cool between passes if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStringer beads:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use stringer beads, not wide weave beads. Weaving increases heat input and interpass temperature. Stringer passes minimize sensitization risk and produce the best corrosion resistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBack step technique:\u003c\/strong\u003e For multi-pass welds, a back-step sequence reduces residual stress and heat accumulation at the joint.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSlag removal:\u003c\/strong\u003e E308L-16 produces a medium-fluidity slag that releases well. Clean thoroughly between passes to prevent slag inclusions in the stainless deposit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eContamination prevention:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use stainless steel wire brushes only — carbon steel brushes contaminate the stainless surface and cause rust staining. Keep welding area free of carbon steel spatter, dust, and debris that can compromise corrosion resistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore in original sealed packaging in a clean, dry location\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo elevated-temperature oven storage required under normal conditions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eAvoid moisture exposure — if rods have absorbed moisture, dry at 300–400°F (150–200°C) for 1 hour before use\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003ePrevent carbon steel contamination of the electrode — store separately from carbon steel rods\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eHandle rods with clean gloves to prevent skin oils from contaminating the coating or the stainless base metal\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrimary base metals:\u003c\/strong\u003e Type 304, 304L, 308, 308L austenitic stainless steel (the most common austenitic stainless grades)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDissimilar joints:\u003c\/strong\u003e E308L can be used for joining 304 stainless to mild carbon steel (with single-layer butter technique for higher-dilution joints), or for welding 304 to 316 where filler metal selection must balance both base metals\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot for Type 316\/316L:\u003c\/strong\u003e For 316 stainless steel in service environments with chlorides, high temperature, or reducing acids, use E316L-16 filler metal that matches the molybdenum content of the 316 base metal\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint types:\u003c\/strong\u003e All groove configurations (V, U, J, flat groove) and fillet welds on austenitic stainless steel per AWS D1.6 (Structural Welding — Stainless Steel) and ASME Section IX\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Harris 308L Stainless\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is E308L-16 welding rod used for?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris 308L (E308L-16) is used for welding Type 304 and 304L austenitic stainless steel in food service, chemical processing, pharmaceutical, dairy, and architectural applications. The extra-low carbon content (L grade) maintains corrosion resistance in the as-welded condition without post-weld heat treatment — critical for service environments where sensitization would cause intergranular corrosion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the difference between 308L and 309L stainless rod?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eE308L-16 is formulated to match 304\/308 austenitic stainless base metals — it is the correct filler for 304-to-304 welds. E309L-16 has higher Cr and Ni content (23% Cr, 13% Ni) and is designed for dissimilar metal welding — joining stainless to carbon steel, or for the first layer in cladding carbon steel with stainless. For 304-to-304 fabrication, use 308L. For joining 304 stainless to mild steel, use 309L as the buffer layer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the difference between E308L and E308?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \"L\" designation means extra-low carbon (≤0.04% C vs. ≤0.08% C for standard E308). The lower carbon content prevents chromium carbide precipitation (sensitization) at the grain boundaries during the heat of welding — preserving the stainless steel's corrosion resistance in the heat-affected zone. For applications where post-weld annealing is not performed, always specify 308L (not 308) to protect against intergranular corrosion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat base metal does Harris 308L weld?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris 308L is designed to weld Type 304, 304L, 308, and 308L austenitic stainless steel base metals. It is not suitable for Type 316 or 316L (where molybdenum-bearing E316L is required), Type 309 or 310 high-alloy grades, or ferritic\/martensitic stainless steels.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat polarity for E308L welding rod?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDC+ (DCEP) is the preferred polarity for E308L-16. This provides a stable arc, good penetration, and optimal mechanical properties in the stainless deposit. AC is also acceptable per the \"-16\" designation but is less commonly used in shop environments where DC machines are available.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCan 308L be used for food grade stainless welding?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. E308L-16 is appropriate for food contact stainless steel applications. The weld deposit composition (18-21% Cr, 9-11% Ni, ≤0.04% C) is compatible with 304 stainless food contact grades. Post-weld cleaning, pickling, and passivation are recommended to remove heat tint and restore the passive layer. Confirm with applicable FDA, NSF, or 3-A Sanitary Standards requirements for your specific application.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat temperature can I interpass weld at with 308L?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMaximum interpass temperature for austenitic stainless steel with E308L is 350°F (177°C). Exceeding this promotes sensitization and increases the risk of hot cracking. Measure with a contact thermometer between passes. If the joint exceeds 350°F, allow it to cool before the next pass.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse all stick electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/harris-316l-stainless-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eHarris 316L\u003c\/a\u003e for molybdenum-bearing stainless in chloride or acid service, or \u003ca href=\"\/products\/harris-309l-stainless-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eHarris 309L\u003c\/a\u003e for dissimilar metal joining of stainless to carbon steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOrdering Harris E308L-16 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis stainless welding rod product ships from WeldingMart — add E308L-16 to your cart to place your order. We stock Harris 308L in multiple package sizes for both occasional-use and production welding shops. Create a WeldingMart account to track order status and maintain a product history for auditing and reorder purposes. In-stock products ship same day. The E308L-16 stainless electrode stock is replenished regularly to ensure availability for food processing, pharmaceutical, and industrial stainless fabricators. Questions about this product before you order? Our specialists can help confirm the correct grade and package for your application.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include test, vertical, way. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include test, vertical, way. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E308L-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E308L-16 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in to 1\/2 in (4.8–12.7 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat\/horizontal preferred\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E308L-16 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E308L-16 include: e308l 16, e308l 16 stainless steel, e308l 16 stainless, 16 stainless steel, 16 stainless, food and pharmaceutical equipment, pharmaceutical equipment, architectural fabrication, 308l 16, brewery. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E308L-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E308L-16 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in to 1\/2 in (4.8–12.7 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat\/horizontal preferred\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E308L-16 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E308L-16 include: e308l 16, e308l 16 stainless steel, e308l 16 stainless, 16 stainless steel, food and pharmaceutical equipment, architectural fabrication, 308l 16, brewery. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E308L-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E308L-16 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in to 1\/2 in (4.8–12.7 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat\/horizontal preferred\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E308L-16 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E308L-16 include: e308l 16 stainless steel. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"WeldingMart.com","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in, 10 lb","offer_id":44258839527575,"sku":"308L650","price":123.12,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in, 10 lb","offer_id":44258839920791,"sku":"308L660","price":120.12,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"5\/32 in, 10 lb","offer_id":44258839953559,"sku":"308L670","price":129.12,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3\/16 in","offer_id":44258839986327,"sku":"308L680","price":135.25,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/16 in, 5 lb Tube","offer_id":44258825175191,"sku":"308L630","price":156.12,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/harris-308l-16-stainless-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-x-12-x-10-box-308l650-harris-1.jpg?v=1753396467"},{"product_id":"harris-309-16-stainless-stick-smaw-welding-rod","title":"Harris 309-16 Stainless Stick SMAW Welding Rod","description":"\u003ch2\u003eHarris 309-16 Stainless Steel Stick Electrode — What Is E309-16?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHarris 309-16\u003c\/strong\u003e is an \u003cstrong\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E309-16\u003c\/strong\u003e austenitic stainless steel SMAW electrode for dissimilar metal welding and high-temperature applications on \u003cstrong\u003eDC+ (DCEP)\u003c\/strong\u003e in all positions. While Harris 309L is the extra-low carbon version for corrosion-sensitive applications, the standard E309-16 grade (carbon ≤0.15%) is appropriate for high-temperature service where carbon content supports creep strength at elevated temperatures. With a nominal composition of 23–25% Cr and 12–14% Ni, Harris 309-16 tolerates high dilution from carbon steel base metals while maintaining an austenitic deposit — ideal for joining stainless steel to carbon steel, first-layer cladding on carbon steel, and welding Type 309 stainless in furnace components, heat exchangers, and high-temperature process equipment operating above the range suited for 308\/316 grades.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAWS Classification \u0026amp; Specifications\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable style=\"min-width: 50px\"\u003e\n\u003ccolgroup\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003ccol style=\"min-width: 25px\"\u003e\n\u003c\/colgroup\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS classification\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E309-16\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eCoating type\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eLime\/titania (-16 type)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003ePolarity\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eDC+ (DCEP) preferred; AC acceptable\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWelding positions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAll positions (F, H, V, OH)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWeld metal carbon (max)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e0.15% C (standard, not L-grade)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWeld metal Cr content\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e22.0–25.0% Cr\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eWeld metal Ni content\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e12.0–14.0% Ni\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin tensile strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e80,000 psi (552 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eMin yield strength\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e58,000 psi (400 MPa)\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eElongation\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e30% minimum\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eTypical current range\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003e3\/32 in: 40–75 A | 1\/8 in: 60–100 A | 5\/32 in: 80–130 A\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eManufacturer\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris Products Group\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eStandards compliance\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"1\" rowspan=\"1\"\u003e\u003cp\u003eAWS A5.4\/A5.4M E309-16\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBest Applications for Harris 309-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDissimilar metal welding — stainless to carbon steel:\u003c\/strong\u003e Same primary use as E309L — joining 304 or 316 stainless steel to A36 or other carbon steel where the higher Cr-Ni content compensates for carbon steel dilution. The standard 309-16 is used when post-weld corrosion in the HAZ is not a primary concern (unlike food-grade or chemical service where 309L is specified).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHigh-temperature service applications:\u003c\/strong\u003e Furnace components, heat shields, annealing furnace hardware, and other applications operating continuously at 1400–2000°F (760–1093°C) where E309's higher carbon content supports creep resistance. In these applications, the carbon content that would cause sensitization in aqueous service is irrelevant.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eType 309 and 309S base metal:\u003c\/strong\u003e Direct matched-composition welding of 309\/309S stainless steel heat-resistant alloy used in high-temperature industrial equipment\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCarbon steel cladding (first layer) for non-corrosive high-temp service:\u003c\/strong\u003e Where the cladding purpose is oxidation resistance at high temperature (not aqueous corrosion resistance), E309-16 is appropriate and provides better high-temperature stability than E309L\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBead-on-plate and overlay work in refinery and chemical plant maintenance:\u003c\/strong\u003e When the applied code permits standard carbon content and high-temperature service is the design driver\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Use Harris 309-16 (Amperage, Polarity \u0026amp; Position)\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAmperage:\u003c\/strong\u003e 60–100 A for 1\/8 in on DC+. Same principle as 309L — low heat input, stringer beads, controlled interpass temperature.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePolarity:\u003c\/strong\u003e DC+ (DCEP) standard. AC permitted by -16 designation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHigh-temperature service considerations:\u003c\/strong\u003e When welding for high-temperature service, preheat per the applicable code for the base material. Avoid rapid cooling — controlled cooling or PWHT may be required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eContamination prevention:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use dedicated stainless steel brushes and grinding wheels even for non-aqueous applications to prevent carbon inclusion in the deposit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo not use E309-16 for cryogenic or sensitization-sensitive service:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use E309L-16 for food service, chemical processing, or other aqueous corrosion applications — the higher carbon in standard E309-16 will sensitize the HAZ.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStorage \u0026amp; Handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore in sealed original packaging in dry conditions; keep away from carbon steel electrodes\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eDry at 300–400°F (150–200°C) for 1 hour if moisture exposure has occurred\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo routine oven storage required under normal shop conditions\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Base Metals \u0026amp; Joint Types\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDissimilar joints:\u003c\/strong\u003e Austenitic stainless (304, 316, 308) to carbon or low-alloy steel\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMatched base metals:\u003c\/strong\u003e Type 309, 309S high-temperature stainless steel\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHigh-temp service:\u003c\/strong\u003e Furnace hardware, heat shields, kiln parts, oxidation-resistant overlays\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot for sensitization-sensitive aqueous corrosion service:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use E309L-16 for food, chemical, and pharmaceutical applications\u003c\/p\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions — Harris 309-16 Stainless\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the difference between 309-16 and 309L-16?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eE309-16 (standard carbon, ≤0.15% C) is suited for high-temperature service and applications where sensitization is not a concern. E309L-16 (extra-low carbon, ≤0.04% C) is used when corrosion resistance must be maintained in the as-welded condition — food service, chemical processing, and aqueous service. For dissimilar metal welding in standard industrial applications, 309L is generally preferred to allow for future service changes. For known high-temperature service, 309-16 is acceptable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen should I use E309-16 vs E308L-16?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse E309-16 for dissimilar metal welding (stainless to carbon steel) or for welding Type 309\/309S base metal. Use E308L-16 for same-metal welds on Type 304\/304L stainless in corrosion-sensitive applications. The key difference is that E309's higher Cr-Ni content tolerates carbon steel dilution that would compromise an E308L deposit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat base metal does Harris 309-16 weld?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris 309-16 welds Type 309 and 309S stainless steel base metals (matched composition) and is used for dissimilar metal joints between austenitic stainless and carbon or low-alloy steel. It is not the first choice for 304-to-304 welds (use 308L) or 316-to-316 welds (use 316L).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCan 309-16 be used for high temperature furnace welding?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes — this is one of the primary applications of E309-16 and Type 309\/309S base metal. With service temperatures up to approximately 2000°F (1093°C) and good oxidation resistance from the high chromium content, E309 deposits perform in furnace hardware, heat shields, kiln liners, and high-temperature process equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat polarity for E309-16 welding rod?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDC+ (DCEP) is preferred. The -16 coating designation permits AC when DC is unavailable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCan Harris 309-16 be used for food service stainless?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor food service, pharmaceutical, and chemical processing applications requiring corrosion resistance in the as-welded condition, use Harris 309L-16 (extra-low carbon), not Harris 309-16. The higher carbon in standard 309-16 will cause sensitization (carbide precipitation) during the weld thermal cycle, compromising corrosion resistance in the HAZ in aqueous environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhat is the difference between E309 and E310 stainless rod?\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eE309 deposits contain approximately 23% Cr \/ 13% Ni. E310 deposits contain 25–28% Cr \/ 20–22% Ni — significantly higher in both elements. E310 is specified for extremely high-temperature service (above the range where E309 is adequate), severe oxidizing atmospheres, and applications requiring superior hot-strength and oxidation resistance above approximately 2000°F. E309 is used for dissimilar joints and standard high-temperature applications; E310 is reserved for severe high-temperature service.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBrowse all stick electrodes:\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods\"\u003eStick Welding Electrodes \u0026amp; Rods\u003c\/a\u003e — compare with \u003ca href=\"\/products\/harris-309l-stainless-stick-smaw-welding-rod\"\u003eHarris 309L\u003c\/a\u003e for low-carbon dissimilar welding in corrosion service, or \u003ca href=\"\/products\/harris-310-16-stainless-stick-smaw-welding-rod-1-8-x-14-x-10-3101660\"\u003eHarris 310-16\u003c\/a\u003e for ultra-high-temperature and severe oxidation applications.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOrdering Harris E309-16 from WeldingMart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eHarris E309-16 stainless welding rods ship from WeldingMart — this product is in stock and available to add to your cart. Place your order online and in-stock items ship the same day. Create a WeldingMart account to track order status, review your product purchase history, and reorder this electrode without re-entering your information. E309-16 is stocked for dissimilar-metal welders joining stainless to carbon steel in industrial, food processing, and maintenance applications. Confirm your diameter and package size in the variant selector before adding this product to cart. For project-based volume orders, contact WeldingMart for stock availability and pricing before you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include wrought, cast form, wrought or cast form. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTechnical Reference \u0026amp; Welding Standards\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen selecting stick electrodes, welders should reference the relevant welding standard and process documentation. Key technical considerations include wrought, cast form, wrought or cast form. Always consult the electrode manufacturer's data sheet and applicable AWS, ASME, or structural welding codes for your specific application. WeldingMart provides technical resources to support your electrode selection and welding process qualification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E309-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E309-16 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in to 1\/2 in (4.8–12.7 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat\/horizontal preferred\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E309-16 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E309-16 include: electrode, welding, steels, stainless steel, 309l 16, e309l 16, welding electrode, 16 stainless steel, stainless steel electrode, welding rod, 16 stainless, current. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E309-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E309-16 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in to 1\/2 in (4.8–12.7 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat\/horizontal preferred\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E309-16 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E309-16 include: electrode, steels, welding, stainless steel, 309l 16, e309l 16, welding electrode, 16 stainless steel, stainless steel electrode, welding rod, 16 stainless, current. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-diameter-guide\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eDiameter Selection Guide for Harris E309-16\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eHarris E309-16 is available in multiple electrode diameters. Selecting the correct diameter for your base metal thickness is critical for weld quality and penetration depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003ctable class=\"diameter-table\"\u003e\n    \u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eElectrode Diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase Metal Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAmperage Range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBest Position\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n    \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e3\/32 in (2.4 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/32 in to 1\/4 in (2.4–6.4 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e1\/8 in (3.2 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\/8 in to 3\/8 in (3.2–9.5 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e75–130 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAll positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5\/32 in (4.0 mm)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3\/16 in to 1\/2 in (4.8–12.7 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110–175 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat\/horizontal preferred\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n    \u003c\/tbody\u003e\n  \u003c\/table\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eThe 1\/8 in (3.2 mm) diameter is the most versatile option for general fabrication on material from 3\/16 in to 3\/8 in thickness. Use 3\/32 in for sheet metal and thin sections where 1\/8 in would cause excessive heat input. Use 5\/32 in for heavier sections where higher deposition rates reduce total welding time. For most structural repair and field work, 1\/8 in is the preferred starting diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eWhen ordering Harris E309-16 in 3\/32 in, 1\/8 in, or 5\/32 in, select the correct diameter variant from the product page before adding to cart. Each diameter is a separate product variant with its own SKU — confirm you have selected the right 1\/8 in, 3\/32 in, or 5\/32 in size before placing your order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e\n\u003csection class=\"pdp-technical-supplement\"\u003e\n  \u003ch2\u003eTechnical Data and Welding Process Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eAdditional technical considerations for Harris E309-16 include: steels, electrode, welding, stainless steel, 309l 16, e309l 16, welding electrode, 16 stainless steel, stainless steel electrode, welding rod, 16 stainless, current. Welders should review the product data sheet for complete welding procedure specifications. Key process parameters such as preheat requirements, interpass temperature, and post-weld heat treatment requirements vary by base metal composition and application code requirements. Consult AWS, ASME, or applicable structural welding codes for code-compliant welding procedures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n  \u003cp\u003eFor best results, store electrodes in a dry environment and use within manufacturer recommended timeframes after opening. Proper electrode storage and handling directly impacts weld quality — follow manufacturer guidance for oven temperatures and rod reconditioning procedures as applicable to this electrode classification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/section\u003e","brand":"WeldingMart.com","offers":[{"title":"3\/32 in Tube","offer_id":44258835038359,"sku":"3091650","price":219.8,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"1\/8 in Tube","offer_id":44258835398807,"sku":"3091660","price":216.2,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Standard Tube","offer_id":44258829631639,"sku":"3091630","price":90.6,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/files\/harris-309-16-stainless-stick-smaw-welding-rod-332-x-12-x-10-tube-3091650-harris-1.jpg?v=1753396587"}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/7140\/4695\/collections\/stick-electrode-and-welding-rods-or-best-stick-welding-supplies-online-weldingmart-com-6716816_7674083f-ddf3-48be-9048-1ad1dec6557f-6781193.png?v=1778176814","url":"https:\/\/weldingmart.com\/collections\/stick-welding-electrodes-rods.oembed?q=excalibur+7018","provider":"WeldingMart.com","version":"1.0","type":"link"}